teaching date saturday september 20th 2008 dan tien secondary school 2010 – 2011 lesson plan english 7 the first semester week 1 teaching date 17 8 2010 period 1 ¤n tëp vµ híng dén ph¬ng ph¸p h

Bạn đang xem bản rút gọn của tài liệu. Xem và tải ngay bản đầy đủ của tài liệu tại đây (1.48 MB, 158 trang )

(1)<div class='page_container' data-page=1>

LESSON PLAN - ENGLISH 7

The first semester

WEEK 1:

Teaching date: 17 / 8 / 2010.

Period 1.

Ôn tập

và hớng dẫn phơng pháp học môn

Tiếng Anh 7

Introduction

I. The aims and requests:

Help ss consolidate grammar of English 6.

By the end of the lesson ss will be able to remember grammar structures such as: The simple

present tense, the present continuous tense, the near future tense . Then they can do exercises

well

Develop 4 skills.

II. Preparation:

1. Teacher’s preparation: lesson plan, posters.

2. Ss’ preparation: books, notebooks.

III. Procedures:

Teacher s activities

’

Ss activities

’

1. Organization: Greeting, “Who’s absent today?”

2. Checking up ( No)

3. New lesson :

A/ Introduce ss how to learn English well :

-T lets ss read the topics of English 7.

- T introduces and explains ss to understand each theme in English 7.
- T lets ss write and learn by heart models of sentences and vocabulary.

B/ Revise programmer of English 6 : grammar.

1. The simple present tense :



Form of to be :

( + ) I: am (-) I am not (?) Am I...?

He He Is he

She is She is not she...?

It It It ( isn’t) it

We We Are we

You are You are not you...?

They They ( aren’t) they



Form of ordinary verbs: get / go/ have / brush...

(+) S + V/ Vs / Ves eg: I go to school by bike.

(-) S + do not He gets up at 6 a.m.

does not She brushes her teeth .

(?) Do + S + V... ?

Does

*Note: Verb ending in o / ch / sh /ss /x) add- es to form 3

person .Eg: He goes / She brushes / He watches.

 Use : The SPT is used to express habitual , routine

usual actions `

2. The present continuous tense :

 Form :

(+) S + am / is / are + V-ing

(-) S + am not / is not / are not + V-ing

1’

3’

20’

- Greeting

- Listen and

remember.

- Copy down.

- Repeat after T

</div>
(2)<div class='page_container' data-page=2>

(?) Am / Is / Are + S + V-ing...?

 Use: The PCT is used for an action happening now.

3. The near future tense :

 Form :

(+) S + am / is / are + going + to -V.

(-) S +am not / is not / are not +going + to-V.

(?) Am / Is / Are + going + to- V... ?

 Use: The NFT is used for intention or prediction to

happen in the near or immediate future.

C- Exercises :

1. Put the verb in the correct tense :

a) She (go)... to school in the afternoons.
b) We (play) ... game at the moment.
c) I (be) ... a good pupil.

d) He (have) ... a party next week.
2. Practice the dialogue with a partner :

Peter: Hello, I’m Peter.

Mai: Hi, I’m Mai. Where are you from?
Peter: I’m from Canada.

Mai: How are you today?
Peter: I’m fine, thanks.

Mai: Are you going to Hanoi city tomorrow?
Peter: Yes, I am. Goodbye.

Mai: See you later.

IV. Consolidation :

Retell the main points of the lesson.

V- Homework :

- Ask ss to learn by heart grammar they’ve revised.

18’

2’

1’

- Copy down.

- Work

individually.

- Go to the bb to

give answer

keys.

- Work in pairs

Retell the main

points.

-Copy down

homeworks

Teaching date: 20 / 8 / 2010 .

Period 2

Unit 1 : Back to school

Lesson 1 : A 1,3

I- The aims and requests \:

- Help ss introduce and greet with “Nice to meet you”; “How are you ? ”

- By the end of the lesson ss will be able to listen work in pairs by using “ Nice to meet you” ; “

How are you ? ” fluently and correctly.

- Develop 4 skills: listening, speaking, reading, writing.

II- Preparation:

1. Teacher’s preparation: lesson plan, cassette, CD.

2. Ss’ preparation: books, notebooks.

III- Procedures:

1. Organization

(1’): greeting “Good afternoon!” “Who’s absent today?”

2. Checking up

( 5’):

a) Questions work in pairs : exercise 2 .1

b)

c) Forms of checking: speaking in pairs.

d) T corrects and gives marks.

3. New lesson

:

Teacher s activities

’

Ss activities

’

</div>
(3)<div class='page_container' data-page=3>

- T explains the way to play; share the class into 2 teams.

- Find out the winner.

B- Pre- teach :

1. Pre- listening :

-T introduces the situation in A1.

- Ask ss to predict the missing words :

Ba: Hello, Nam.

Nam: Hi, Ba. Nice to see you again.

Ba: Nice to (1)... you, too.

Nam: This is our new classmate .Her name’s Hoa.

Ba: Nice to meet (2)..., Hoa.

Hoa: (3)... to meet you, Ba.

2. While- listening:

a) T gets feedback, ss give the answer keys :

*Keys : 1- see 2- you 3- nice

b) T asks ss to listen A1 (a, b) p.10 in 3 times.

- T asks ss to repeat in chorus, and then work in groups of 3.

- T asks one or two groups to practice the dialogue in class.

- T explains the different “ Nice to see you ” with “ Nice to see

you again”

“Nice to see you”: 2 ngời gặp nhau lần đầu và đợc giới thiệu để

làm quen.

-“Nice to see you again: 2 ngời gặp lại sau1 thời gian “slap

the board”.

* “So am I”: diễn tả sự đồng tình.

c) A3- p.12 :

- Ask ss to look at the picture and answer the questions :

- Who are they?

- What are they doing?

- T plays the tape 3 times. Then ask ss to repeat in pairs.

3- Post- listening : Mapped dialogue :

Mr. Hai

Lan

.... morning, ....

.... fine, thanks . And you?

Good bye. See....

.... morning, ....

How...?

...well. Good bye.

IV- Consolidation :

Retell the different “Nice to see / meet you” ; “Nice to see /

meet you again ”; Hi / Hello / Good ...

V- Homework :

- Ask ss to learn by heart the way to greet each other and ask

about their health.

- Ask ss to prepare lesson for the next period.

2’

10 9’

10 3’

1’

- Play game in 2

teams.

“slap the board”

-Ss predict the

missing words

individually.

-Listen and give

the keys

- Listen to the

tape.

- Repeat in

chorus.

- Work in

groups of 3.

- Copy down

- Look at the

picture& answer

* They are

greeting each

other.

* Mr. Tan &

Nga

- Side- side

- Open - pairs

- Close- pairs

Hello

Classmate

Good

morning

Good

morning

Good

bye

Good

bye

Too

</div>
(4)<div class='page_container' data-page=4>

Teaching date: 22 / 8 / 2010

Period 3

Unit 1 : Back to school

Lesson 2 – A 2

I- The aims and requests:

- Help ss to read the details and revise the simple present tense; comparisons; “a lot of... /

many ...”

- By the end of the lesson ss will be able to answer the questions after reading a text about Hoa

correctly.

- Develop 4 skills: listening, speaking, reading, writing.

II- Preparation:

1. Teacher’s preparation: lesson plan, poster, book.

2. Ss’ preparation: books, notebooks.

III- Procedures:

1. Organization (1’): - Good afternoon! – Who’s absent today?

2. Checking up ( 5’)

a- Questions : work in pairs ( listen - part a .A1,p.10 )

b- Keys.

c- Forms of checking: pair works.

d- T corrects and gives marks.

3. New lesson :

Teacher s activities

’

Ss activities

’

*Warm up: Matching.

-T hangs a poster on the bb, asks ss to match some

words.

aunt cô, dì
happy cha mÑ

live vui vẻ, hạnh phúc
school chó , b¸c

big míi
uncle sèng
parents lín
new trêng häc

A. Pre

–

reading

:

1. Pre – teach :( Vocabulary) T presents some new

words.

- Different ( adj ) : kh¸c nhau ( example)

- Unhappy ( adj ) : kh«ng vui , buån ( antonym)

- (to) miss ( v ) : nhí ( explanation)

- Lots of / a lot of : nhiÒu ( translation)

- Many / still : nhiỊu / vÉn cßn ( translation )

- Bigger than : lín h¬n , to h¬n ( example )

- Friends : b¹n bÌ (translation).



‘Many’ dïng chñ yÕu trong câu Phủ Định và câu

Nghi vấn.

A lot of (lots of): danh từ ko đếm đc và danh từ số

nhiều trong câu Khẳng định.

Check: Rub out & Remember.

2. T/F statements prediction :

- T explains new situation: Hoa is a new student in HH

school. Do you know where is she come from, who’s she

staying with? Now just guess about her.

4’

6’

- One by one to go

to the b.b to math.

- Others look at this

and corrects.

- Listen & repeat in

chorus – Work

individually

- Copy down.

- Rewrite words

- Listen

</div>
(5)<div class='page_container' data-page=5>

- Ask ss to guess T or F?

a) Hoa is from Hue.

b) She lives with her parents in Hanoi

c) She has a lot of friends in Hanoi.

d) She misses her parents in Hue.

e) She is happy now.

B- While

–

reading

:

- Ask ss to read and corrects their predictions.

* Get feedback : a) T ; b) F ; c) F ; d) T ; e) F

*- Comprehension questions :

Ask ss to answer 5 qs < A2- p.11 > in 10’.

* Get feedback :

a) Hoa is from Hue.

b) She is staying with her uncle and aunt in Hanoi.

c) No, she doesn’t.

d) Her new school is bigger than her old school.

e) Because she misses her parents and her friends.

C- Post

–

reading

:

* Transformation writing:

Ask ss to change “ Hoa” to “ I ”

Ex: I am a new student in class 7A. I am from Hue.



For stronger Ss: change the information and change

“Hoa” to “I”.



Ex: I’m a new student in class 7B. I’m from BG.

…

IV- Consolidation :

Retell contents of A2.

V- Homework :

Learn by heart vocabulary.

Do exercises in workbook.

Prepare for next lesson.

20’

5’

2’

1’

2’

1’

- Ss to guess T or

F?

- Work

individually, then

share with their

partner.

- Read the text and

check their

predictions

- Answer the

questions (work in

pairs)

- Transformation

writing.

- Look at the

example & write

- Retell the main

points of this

lesson.

- Copy down

homework.

Dân Tiến, ngày ... tháng 8 năm 2010

Ký Duyệt

Nguyễn Thị Tám

WEEK 2:

Teaching date: 24 / 8 / 2010

Period 4

Unit 1: Back to school

Lesson 3 – A 4, 5

I .The aims and requests:

- Help ss how to introduce & greet with “How everything”

- By the end of the lesson ss will be able to listen & complete the dialogue well.

- Develop 4 skills: L, S, R, and W.

II .Preparation:

1. Teacher’s preparation: textbook, pictures, sub- board, CD, Radio, poster.

2. Students’ preparation: book, notebook, workbook

III. Procedures:

</div>
(6)<div class='page_container' data-page=6>

2- Checking up ( 4’) :

Ask two ss to perform their writing.

T corrects & gives them marks.

3- New lesson :

Teacher s activities

’

Ss activities

’

A. Pre- listening :

- T elicits some new words or phrases.

- pretty good (adj ): khá tốt, tơng đối tốt ( explanation)

- How is everything? : Mọi việc nh thế nào?( translation)

- Nice to see you! # Nice to see you again! (revision)

- So am I / Me, too : Tôi cũng vậy ( translation)

- Just fine: rất khoẻ, binh thuong. (translation)

* Check : Matching

B- While- listening :

1) Gap fill :

- T hangs a poster about A4 < p.12, 13 > a, b.

- Ask ss to predict some missing words or phrases first.

- Compare with their partner.

- Ask Ss listen to the Radio and check their predictions.

* Get feedback :

a) Mr. Tan: ... How are you?

Miss Lien: pretty good.... How about you?

Mr. Tan: Not bad...

Miss Lien: So am I.

b) Nam: ... How is everything?

Nga: O.K.... How are you today?

Nam: Just fine...

Nam: Yes, me, too.

- T gives answer keys( hangs poster)

2) Ask ss to work in pairs.( Read again the dialogue)

3) A5: Ask ss to listen and write the letter of the dialogue in

their order they hear.

- T plays cassette 3 times.

- T hangs picture cue drill.

- Get feedback :

C- Post

–

listening

: Mapped dialogue.

Ba

Nam

.... morning ,.... --->

.... too .How is ....? -->

.... bye. See you again -->

.... morning, ....

Nice....again .

Bye.

IV- Consolidation :

Retell the contents of A 4, 5.

V – Homework :

Learn by heart new words.

Do the exercise A1,2,3 < p. 3, 4 – workbook >

- Prepare for next lesson.

7’

5’

10’

5’

2’

1’

- Listen to T

- Repeat in

chorally-

individually

- Match words

- Do individually,

then compare.

- Listen & check

- Give answer

keys.

- Work in pairs

- Listen & write

- Work in pairs

- Retell the main

points of this

lesson.

</div>
(7)<div class='page_container' data-page=7>

Teaching date: 26 / 8 / 2010.

Period 5

Unit 1: Back to school

Lesson 4: b 1-2-3.

Name and addresses

I. The aims and requests:

- By the end of the lesson ss will be able to ask and give (name, age, address) well.6

- Help ss how to ask and give personal information.

II. Preparation:

1. T’ preparation: Lesson plan, word cues, picture, Radio, CD, posters.

2. SS’ preparation: Book and notebook.

III. Procedures;

T’s activities

ss’ activities

1. Organization: - Greeting – “Who’s absent today?”

2.Checking up & warm up :

+Ask 2 ss to ask & answer the qs;



Where is Hoa from?



Why is Hoa unhappy?

T corrects and gives them marks.

+ Play a game: Slap the board.

different unhappy miss just fine

pretty good friends

T shares the class into 2 teams.

3.New lesson :

I .Presentation :

1. Pre-teach;

T presents some new words;

+ grade ; khèi líp

+ family name : họ ( explanation )

+ middle name : tên đệm ( example )

+ an address : địa chỉ ( example )



Check: Matching.

2. Presentation dialogue :

-T presents the dialogue B1- p15 :

+ How many people are there in this picture?

+ Who are they?

Comprehension qs :

-T asks ss to answer the qs given;

a. Who is Hoa talking to?

b. What is Hoa’s family name?

c. What is her middle name?

d. Where does she live?

- Get feedback.

II. Practice :

1. Word cues drill :

- T runs through the cues.

1’

3’

6’

4’

- Greeting.

- one asks – the other

answers

-Play game in 2 teams.

- Slap the board.

- Find out the winner

- Listen to the T

- Repeat in chorally –

individually.

- Copy down.

- Match words

- listen to the T.

answer in individually

a. Hoa is talking to

Miss Lien.

b. Hoa’s family name

is Pham.

</div>
(8)<div class='page_container' data-page=8>

- Ask ss to practice in exchange.

* Nam / Nguyen / 15 years old / 20Le Loi street.

* Mai / Tran / 14 / 2 Nguyen khuyen.

* Nam / Duong / 16 / 25 Tran phu

example exchange:

T: What is Nam’s family name?

S1: His family name is Nguyen.

T: How old is he?

S1: He’s 15.

T: Where does he live?

S1: 20 Le Loi Street.

2.Gap

–

fill: B2- p.16

Ask ss to fill in each blank with a suitable word

Answer key:

*Nga: Who... ? / Who....? / Which....?/ Where....?/

Where...?

- Ask ss to work in pairs.

III. Production : B3 – p.16

Ask ss to ask their partner , then fill in the form:



Name: ...



Age : ...



Grade ...



School: ...



Home address: ...

4.Consolidation :

Retell the use of some Wh - qs.

5.Homework :

Do the exercise ( B1,2 p. 5,6 – workbook )

Learn by heart new words.

14’

10’

2’

1’

- run through the cues

Practice in exchange:

T- the whole class

half – half

open pairs

close pairs.

- Do individually

-Ask their partners to

fill some information

in the form.

- Retell

- Do the exercises

Teaching date: 27 / 8 / 2010.

Period 6

Unit 1: Back to school

Lesson 5: b 4,5,6,7.

I .The aims and requests:

- Help ss use “How far” questions and answers with “kilometers / meters” to talk about

distance.

- After the lesson ss will be able to practice with their partner by using Wh- questions; How

questions fluently.

- Develop 4 skills: listening, speaking, reading and writing

II .Preparation:

1. Teacher’s preparation: lesson plan, tape, cassette, pictures.

2. Students’ preparation: book, notebook, workbook

III. Procedures:

1. Organization (1’): greeting “Who’s absent today?”

2. Checking up ( 4 )

’ :

a) Qs: ask & answer with: 1- What’s your name?

2- How old are you?

</div>
(9)<div class='page_container' data-page=9>

2- I’m 14/13…

3- It’s about 2/3 kilometers.

c) Forms of checking: speaking.

d) T corrects & gives them marks.

3- New lesson:

Teacher s activities

’

Ss activities

’

A- Presentation :

1. Pre- teach : T presents some new words :

- far ( adj) : xa ( example)

- distance( n) : khoảng cách ( explanation)

- movie theater (n) : r¹p chiÕu phim ( explanation)

- means of transport (n) ( explanation)

* Check: Matching.

2. Presentation dialogue : < B4 – p. 16,17 >

- Comprehension qs: a) – Where does Hoa live?

b)- Is it far from school?

c) – How does she get there ?

* Model sentences : < B5 – p. 17 >

- T: How far is it from your house to school?

Ss: It is about one kilometer from my house to school.

B- Practice: word cues drill.

- T runs through all the cues.
- T asks ss to practice in exchange :

a) – The market / school / 2 kilometers.
b) – The post office / bank / 7 kilometers.
c) – The bus stop / movie theater / 3 kilometers.

Example exchange: How far is it from the market to school? –
It’s about 2 kilometers.

C- Production : Survey < B7 – p.18 >

Name

Nam

Lan

Hoa

address

Ha village

distance

2 kilometers

transport

by bike

Ex:

T: Where do you live?
Ss: I live in Ha village.

T: How far is it from your house to school?
Ss: It’s about 2 kilometers.

T: How do you go to school?
Ss: by bike.

IV. Consolidation :

Retell the way to ask & answer about distance.

5’

3’

16’

7’

- Listen to the T

- Repeat in

chorally –

individually

- Copy down.

- Match words.

- Give short

answers: a)12

Tran Hung Dao

street. b).... c)...

- Listen & work

in pairs

- Run through all

the cues.

T - the whole

class

- Half- half

- Open pairs.

- Close pairs.

- Ask their partner

& fill in the form

</div>
(10)<div class='page_container' data-page=10>

V. Homework :

- Learn by heart the new words

- Do the exercises in B3, 4 – p.6,7 –workbook .

2

1 - Copy down

homework.

Dân Tiến, ngày ... tháng 8 năm 2010

Ký Duyệt

Nguyễn Thị Tám

WEEK 3:

Teaching date: 31 / 8 / 2010.

Period 7

Unit 2: personal information

Lesson 1: a 1 - 3.

I .The aims and requests:

- Help ss how to give the telephone numbers.

- By the end of the lesson ss will be able to ask and give the telephone numbers, then

further practice in address well.

- Develop 4 skills: listening, speaking, reading and writing

II. Preparation:

1. Teacher’s preparation: lesson plan, poster, cassette, tape.

2. Students’ preparation: books, notebooks, workbook

III. Procedures:

1. Organization (1 )

’ : greeting “Who’s absent today?”

2. Checking up (3 )

’ :

a) Question: How far is it from your house to school? – S1

b) Answer: It’s about ....kilometer(s) – S2

S3: write vocabulary.

c) Forms of checking: speaking, writing.

d) T corrects and gives them marks.

3. New lesson:

Teacher s activities

’

Ss activities

’

 Warm up : “ Bingo”

-T presents how to play this game :

* Distance / movie theater / family name / friends /

address / different / unhappy.

- Find out the winner.

A- Presentation :

1. Pre – teach: T explains some new words.

 call somebody (n) : gọi cho ai đó ( explanation)

 personal ( adj) : thuộc về cá nhân ai ( explanation)

 information (n) : thông tin ( translation)

2.Presentation text : A3 < p. 20 >

T presents new sentence : give model sentences

 What is your / his / her telephone number?

 865. 732.

* Get feedback :

3’

8’

-Ss write 3or 4

words.

- Listen 7 t read if

ss have the same

words – please

say “Bingo”

- listen to the T

- Repeat in

chorally, and then

do individually.

- Copy down.

- Listen to the T.

-Repeat in chorus.

T --> w.c

</div>
(11)<div class='page_container' data-page=11>

B- Practice :

1. Word cue drill :

- T runs through all cues.

- Practice in exchange :

Ex: s1: What is his telephone number? ( Nam / 864534)

s2: 864 534.

 An / 7345 610

 Ba / 6351 793

 Bang / 8237 041

 Bao / 8521 936

3. A2 : listen and write telephone numbers :

T plays the tape 3 times, asks ss to listen to the tape

and write numbers they hear.

* Get feedback ; a) 8251 654 d) 8351 793

b) 8250 514 e) 8237 041

c) 8521 936 f) 8821 652

C- Further practice: A3- p.20.

-T asks to listen to the tape 3 times, and then work in pairs.

Lan: ...

Hoa: ...

D- Production

: Survey – p. 20.

-Ask ss to ask their classmates & complete the list :

Name

Address

Telephone numbers

Lan

Dung

Ex: s1: What’s your telephone number, Lan?

Lan: 8262 091.

s1: Where do you live?

Lan: I live...

IV- Consolidation :

-Retell the way to ask about one’s telephone number by

using “What’s your / his / her telephone number?”

V- Homework :

- Learn by heart vocabulary / new structures.

- Do the exercise in A1, 2 – workbook.

14’

7’

6’

2’

1’

- Open pairs

- Close pairs

T--> w.c

- Side – side

-Open pairs -->

close pairs

- Listen & write

telephone

numbers.

-Listen & practice

in pairs.

- Work in pairs to

complete the list

given.

Some Ss to retell

the main points of

this lesson.

Copy down

homework.

Teaching date: 1 / 9 / 2010.

Period 8

Unit 2: personal information

Lesson 2: a 4 - 5.

I. The aims and requests:

- Help ss understand “What- questions” to talk about sure events in the future by using “will”

in positive statements.

- By the end of the lesson ss will be able to practice “will” with “Wh- questions” well.

- Develop 4 skills: l, S, R & W.

</div>
(12)<div class='page_container' data-page=12>

1. Teacher’s preparation: lesson plan, cassette, tape, word cues, posters.

2. Ss’ preparation: books, notebooks.

III. Procedures:

Teacher s activities

’

SS activities

’

1. Organization: greeting “Who’s absent today?”

2. Checking up + warm up :

- Ask ss to do A2 (a,b).

- Jumbled words: 1. vomei -.> movie; 2. rehatte --> theater; 3.

pletloehe -> telephone ; 4. lcal -> call ; 5. nuhpayp -> unhappy.

* Keys : a )A – x ; B – v

b)A – v ; B – x

3. New lesson :

A- Presentation :

1. Pre

–

teach

: Vocabulary: T presents some new words .

- (to) meet : gặp ( translation)

- free (adj) : rảnh rỗi ( antonym )

- (to) start : bắt đầu ( antonym)

- great (adj) : tuyệt ( translation)

- Can I speak to...? : Tơi có thể nói chuyện với ...?

- Who’s calling? : Ai đang gọi đấy?

2. Presentation dialogue :

-Ask ss to predict what they will talk.

Tam Phong

- Comprehension questions : A4 – p.21

- Ask ss to predict the answers

* Keys : a) Phong & Tam

b) They will see a movie.

c) They’ll meet at 6.45.

d) They’ll meet in front of the movie theater.

3. Model sentence:

T sets the scene and gives model sentences:

 Where will we meet?

 We’ll meet in front of the movie theater.

Practice in exchange :

Concept check :

*Meaning: Chúng ta sẽ gặp nhau ở đâu? Chúng ta sẽ

gặp nhau ở trớc rạp chiếu phim.

* Form: -Where + will + S + V?

- S + will + V + Prep + place.

* Use: to express the simple future tense.

* Pronunciation: falling at the end of the sentence.

B- Practice : word cue drill :

- T helps ss run through the cues :

a) Where / meet /? (in the street )

b) What / see /? ( a film )

Ex: Where will we meet? We’ll meet in the bookshop.

Call some pairs to practice A4- P.21.

C- Production: A5- P.21 – Listening.

- Ask ss to fill information in the form after 3 times they

1’

7’

5’

6’

10’

8’

-greeting

- work in pairs

- Listen & repeat

in chorally ,then

do individually

-Match words.

They are Tam and

Phong

- Phone

number: ...

- Copy down

- Translate.

- Copy down.

- Run through the

cues.

</div>
(13)<div class='page_container' data-page=13>

hear.

 Telephone number: 8 545 545.

 They will see: a movie.

 They will meet at: Lan’s house.

 They will go by: bus.

* Get feedback.

IV- Consolidation :

T asks ss to say again the model of the simple future tense

with Wh- qs.

V- Homework :

- Learn by heart vocabulary.

- Do the exercises 1-> 5

2’

1’

form.

-Give their

answers.

- Retell the main

points of this

lesson

- Copy down

homework.

Teaching date: 3 / 9 / 2010.

Period 9

Unit 2: personal information

Lesson 3: a 6,7

I. The aims and requests:

- Help ss read the dialogue between Han and Phong.

- After the lesson ss will be able to understand the dialogue and answer the questions correctly.

- Develop 4 skills: L, S, R and W.

II. Preparation:

Teacher’s preparation: lesson plan, poster.

SS’ preparation: books, notebooks.

III. Procedures:

Teacher s activities

’

SS activities

’

1. Organization: Greeting, “Who’s absent today?”

2. Checking up + warm up :

- Ask ss to make questions and answers: What / do /? – I /

my / homework/ next Sunday morning.

- Keys: - What will you do? I do my homework next Sunday

morning.

- Forms of checking: writing.

- T corrects and gives them marks.

3. New lesson:

A- Pre- teach :

T elicits some new words :

- (to) speak to : nãi chun víi ai ( explanation)

- (to) be out : ë ngoµi , ®i v¾ng ( translation )

1’

5’

Greeting

-Work in pairs

</div>
(14)<div class='page_container' data-page=14>

- (to) be back : quay vÒ ( translation )

* Checking : Rub out & Remember

B- Reading :

1. Pre- reading

: ( T / F statements )

- T gives a poster with 5 sentences.

- T asks ss to predict T / F.

a) Phong calls Lan,

b) Han is phong’s sister.

c) Lan’s out when Phong calls her.

d) Lan’ll be back at 5 o’clock.

e) Phong’ll call Lan after 6 o’clock.

- T gets feedback : a- T ; b- F ; c- T ; d- F ; e- T

2. While

–

reading

:

- Ask ss to read the dialogue again to answer the questions.

- T corrects and gets feedback :

a) Phong is calling.

b) Han is answering the phone.
c) They are talking about Lan.

d) She will be back at about 6 o’clock.
e) Phong will call her again after 6.

3. Post- reading : ( Role play)

- Ask ss to work in pairs to make the similar dialogue.
- T gets feedback.

- Play with words: Will you come to my party?

IV- Homework :

T says again the dialogue.

V- Consolidation :

- Learn by heart vocabulary.

- Prepare the lesson for the next lesson.

6’

10’

7’

8’

2’

1’

- Read & guess

T / F

- Give answers

- Read & check

- Copy down

- Ss predict T/F?

- Read & answer

the questions

- Side - side to

read.

- Work in pairs

- Listen to the T

& some Ss retell

the main points.

-Copy down

homework.

Dân Tiến, ngày ... tháng 9 năm 2010

Ký DuyÖt

</div>
(15)<div class='page_container' data-page=15>

WEEK 4:

Teaching date: 7/ 9 / 2010.

Period 10

Unit 2: personal information

Lesson 4: b1, 2, 3, 9.

My birthday

I .The aims and requests:

- By the end of the lesson ss will be able to talk about dates of a month & the names of the

months in a year.

- Help ss understand & remember the names of the dates in a month; the names of the months in

a year fluently.

- Develop 4 skills: listening, speaking, reading and writing.

II. Preparation:

1. Teacher’s preparation: lesson plan, poster, cassette, tape.

2. Students’ preparation: book, notebook, workbook.

III. Procedures:

Teacher’s activities

SS’ activities

1. Organization: greeting, “Who’s absent today?”

2. Checking up + Warm up :

- Ask 2 ss to practice: “Will you come to my party?”

- Correct and give ss marks.

A- The dates of a month < B1, 2 >.

a) Listen and repeat :

- From 1

to 31

- Play the tape 3 times.

b) Listen and write :

- T has a poster of the dates.

- T plays the tape.

- T corrects gets feedback :

 the first of July

 the nineteenth

 the sixth

 the fourteenth

 the seventeenth

B- The names of the month in a year :

1’

5’

16’

- Greeting

- Work in pairs

- Listen and repeat in

chorally

- Copy down.

- Listen and write the

dates

-Work individually.

</div>
(16)<div class='page_container' data-page=16>

1. January 5. May 9. September

2. February 6. June 10. October

3. March 7. July 11. November

4. April 8. August 12. December

- T rubs out some months.

- T corrects.

C- Play with words : < B. 9 >

- T reads first :

 September / April / June / November : 30 days

 February: 28 or 29 days.

 January / March / May / July / August / October /

December : 31 days

IV- Consolidation:

-T retells the dates of a month and the names of the

months in a year.

V- Homework :

- Learn by heart the dates; the names of the months in a

year.

- Do the exercises 1, 2, 3 – P.10 , 11 in workbook.

13’

7’

2’

1’

chorally.

- Try to remember and

write the rubbed words

- Work individually.

- Listen

- Read aloud.

Repeat &

remember.

- Some Ss retell the

main points of this

lesson.

Copy down homework.

Teaching date: 8 / 9 / 2010.

Period 11

Unit 2: personal information

Lesson 5: b4, 5. My birthday

I .The aims and requests:

Help ss how to say the date of birth.

After the lesson, Ss will be able to ask and answer about the date of birth fluently and they

continue to practice the simple future tense.

Develop 4 skills: listening, speaking, reading and writing.

II. Preparation:

1. Teacher’s preparation: textbook, pictures, sub- board, Radio, CD.

2. Students’ preparation: book, notebook, workbook.

III. Procedures:

1. Organization (1’): greeting “Who’s absent today?”

2. Checking up (4’): ask ss to say about ordinal numbers, names of the months.

-Teacher corrects and gives them marks.

3- New lesson:

T’s Activities

Ss’ Activities

A. Warm up ( 6 ):

’

- Greetings.

-Have Ss play a game called Lucky numbers.

1) What’s your family name?

2) How old are you?

6’

- Greetings.

</div>
(17)<div class='page_container' data-page=17>

3) LN

4) What’s your address?

5) What’s your telephone number?

6) What’s your date of birth?

7) LN

8) Who do you live with?

9) How old will you be on your next birthday?

10) LN

- Remark and lead in new lesson.

B. New activities ( 31 )

’

a) Listen. Then practice with a partner.

- Ask Ss to look at the picture about Mr. Tan

and Hoa. Then ask ss to guess what Mr. Tan is

asking Hoa.

- Call on some ss to answer.

- Ask ss to listen to the tape and give the

information.

- Explain some new words:

+ Nervous ( adj) : lo l¾ng, bån chån

( explanation)

+ To worry(v) : lo l¾ng ( example)

+ Worried ( adj ) : lo l¾ng

- Ask ss to read in chorus and individually.

 Checking: What and where.

- Play the tape for ss to listen again.

- Ask ss to read the dialogue in pairs.

- Call on some pairs to read in front of the

class.

- Correct their pronunciation.

- Ask ss to look at the questions and work in

pairs.

- Call on some pairs to practice asking and

answering in front of the class.

- Call on one student to go to the board and

write the answers.

- Correct and ask ss to copy down.

* About you:

- Ask a student some questions in part about

you.

- Ask ss to work in pairs.

- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the

class.

b) Read the dialogue again. Then complete this

form.

- Ask ss to read the dialogue again and

complete the form.

- Ask ss to exchange the result with the

partner.

- Ask ss to work in pairs asking and answering

about the information in the form.

- Correct and ask ss to complete the form in

the notebooks.

4. Consolidation( 2 ):

’

- Retell the content of

31 7’

2’

- Listen.

- Look at the picture and guess.

- Answer.

- Give the information:

+ Name.

+ Date of birth.

+ Address

+ Telephone number.

- Listen and repeat in chorus

and individually.

- Copy down.

- Work individually.

- Play a game.

- Listen to the tape.

- Work in pairs.

- Practice reading in front of the

class.

- Work in pairs.

- Practice in front of the class.

- Write the answers on the

board.

- Copy down.

- Answer T’s questions.

- Work in pairs.

- Practice in front of the class.

- Read the dialogue again.

- Complete the form.

- Exchange the result with the

partner.

- Work in pairs.

- Practice in front of the class.

- Two ss to ask and answer in

front of the class.

- Copy down.

</div>
(18)<div class='page_container' data-page=18>

the dialogue

5. Homework ( 1 ):

’

- Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines

for each.

- Do exercise 3,4 at page 11 in workbook.

1’

lesson.

- Copy down homework.

Teaching date: 10/ 9/2012.

Period 12

Unit 2: personal information

Lesson 6: b6, 7, 8.

My birthday

I. The aims and requests:

- Help ss how to write an invitation card for a birthday party.

- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to write an invitation card for a birthday party. They

will use the dates of the month fluently.

- Develop 4 skills: listening, speaking and writing.

II. Preparation:

1. T’ preparation: lesson plan , pictures, cards

2. Ss’ preparation: book, notebook, workbook.

III. Procedures:

1. Organization (1’): Greeting. Who’s absent today?

2. Checking

–

up + warm up

: (7’)

* Aks 2 ss to aks and answer about their date of birth.

- T corrects and gives marks.

* Warm up :

- Ask ss to play a game : Networks

cakes

- Call on 2 ss from 2 groups to go to the board and

write.

- Remark and lead in new lesson.

* New lesson:

A. Vocabulary: (7’)

* T presents some new words:

- birthday party: tiªc sinh nhËt ( picture )

- to invite (v) : mêi ( situation )

- invitation card (n ):giÊy mêi ( realia )

- to finish (v) = to end ( synonym )

- to join (v) = to take part in ( synonym )

- fun ( n) : sù vui vỴ, cc vui ( translation)

* Checking: Rub out and remember.

B. Pre – writing: (5’)

- Ask ss to look at the pictures and answer the

questions:

+ What is Lan doing?

+ What are they doing in the picture?

-T gets feedback.

C. While- writing:(15’)

7’

5’

15 - Play a game in 2 groups.

Discuss in groups.

- Go to the board and

write.

- Listen and repeat in

chorus and individually.

- Copy down.

- play a game.

Things to buy

on birthday

</div>
(19)<div class='page_container' data-page=19>

1- Ask ss to read the text about Lan and find out the

answers to the question:

+ How old is she now?

+ Where does she live?

+ When is her birthday?

+ When will the party start and finish?

- Call on some ss to answer the questions.

- Call on some ss to read the text aloud.

- Ask ss to look at the invitation card of Lan and

then complete it, using the information from the

text.

- Aks ss to compare the result with the partner.

- Call on some ss to read the completed card aloud.

- Correct the mistake and ask ss to write in the

notebooks.

2- Now write an invitation card to your birthday

party.

- Aks ss to write an invitation to their birthday party

based on part 6.

- Ask ss to exchange their writing with the partner.

- Call on some ss to read their invitation in front of

the class.

- Remark.

D - Post- writing: (6’)

* Play with words:

-Ask ss to look at the book and listen to the tape.

-Ask ss to read after the tape.

- Call on some Ss to read in front of the class.

- Correct their pronunciation.

4. Consolidation

: ( 3’ )

- Ask Ss to look at remember and repeat again.

5. Homework: ( 1’ )

- Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for

each. Learn by heart part remember.

- Do exercise 4,5 on page 12 in workbook.

6’

3’

1’

-Look at the picture and

answer the question in

individual.

- Read the text and find the

answers for the questions

in individually.

- Read the text aloud

- Complete the invitation

card

Compare with the partner

- Read aloud.

- Write an invitation.

- Exchange the writing

with the partner.

- Read aloud.

- Listen to the tape.

- Read after the tape.

- Read aloud.

- Repeat.

- Copy down homework

D©n TiÕn, ngày ... tháng 9 năm 2010

Ký Duyệt

Nguyễn Thị Tám

WEEK 5:

Teaching date: 14/ 9/2010.

Period 13

revision

A/ The aims and requests:

- Doing exercises in work book.

- By the end of the lesson, sts will be able to revise the knowledge in Units 1, 2.

B. Preparation:

1. T’s preparation: - Lesson plan, exercises, and poster.

2. Ss’ preparation: - Work book, notebook.

</div>
(20)<div class='page_container' data-page=20>

Teacher s activities

’

Students activities

’

I. Organization: greeting “Who’s absent today?”

II. Checking up :

Ask 2 ss to read their invitation cards they’ve

written at home.

T corrects and gives them marks.

III. New lesson :

1- Wh- questions: What / Where / When / Why/ Who /

How / How far.



Exercise 1: Make questions.

a) My name is Mai.

b) She is 13 years old.

c) Her date of birth is on June 2

.

d) Her address is in Dinh village.

e) It’s about one kilometer from my house to school.

f) I go to school by bike.

g) He lives with his parent.

h) Mrs. Ha is our teacher.

2- Simple future tense :

(+) S + will + V.

(-) S + will not (won’t) + V.

(?) Will + S + V?



Exercise 2: Put the verb in the correct tense.

a) He (be)... 14 on his next birthday.

b) I (come) ... back tomorrow.

c) Hoa (brush) ... her teeth after meal.

d) She (have) ... a party tonight.



Exercise 3: exercise 2 p.10- workbook.

*Answer key :

Exercise 1:

a) What’ her name?

b) How old is she?

c) When is her date of birth?

d) What is her address?

e) How far is it from your house to school?

f) How do you go to school?

g) Who does he live with?

h) Who is your teacher?

Exersice2 : a) will be

b) will come

c) brushes

d) will have

Exercise 3 : a) at / on

b) on

c) on

d) from / to

e) on

f) from / to

2’

5’

15’

10’

- Greeting

- Read their invitation

card aloud.

- Ss repeat how to use

Wh- questions

individually.

- Work in pairs.

- Retell the form and

use of the simple

future tense.

- Ss do individually.

- Work in two groups.

- Rewrite

- Some Ss to go to the

board to write

questions.

</div>
(21)<div class='page_container' data-page=21>

g) at / on

h) in

j ) on

IV. Consolidation :

Retell the content: Wh – questions ; Simple future

tense ; Prepositions .

V . Homework :

- Do exercise 2 in workbook.

- Learn by heart Vocabulary and some old structure

grammar.

- Prepare for next lesson.

2’

1’

Give answer

keys Exercises 3

- One by one

- Retell the main

points of this lesson.

- One by one

-Copy down

homework.

Teaching date: 15/ 9/2009.

Period 14

Unit 3: at home

Lesson 1: a1, 3.What lovely home

A. The aims and requests:

- Help ss read the dialogue between Hoa and Lan to know the furniture in Hoa’s house, revising

:( there is.... / there are...)

By the end of the lesson ss will be able to read the dialogue fluently. They revise (there is/ there

are)

- Develop 4 skills: listening, speaking, reading and writing.

B. Preparation:

1. Teacher’s preparation: lesson plan, picture, cassette, tape.

2. Ss’ preparation: books, workbooks.

C. Procedures:

1. Organization: greeting, “Who’s absent today?”

2. Checking up + warm up (6’): ask ss to play a game (Networks)

- Call on 2 ss to go to the board and write down.

- Remark and give them marks.

3. New lesson :

T’s Activities

Ss’ Activities

1.Pre- teach : - Vocabulary :( 7’) teacher explains

some

new words.

- awful ( adj ) : kinh khđng, tåi tƯ ( situation)

- comfortable ( adj ):thoải mái , dễ

chịu( antonym)

- sink ( n ) : bån röa ( picture )

- tub ( n ) : bån t¾m ( picture )

- Listen and repeat in chorus

– individual.

- Copy down.

bathroo

</div>
(22)<div class='page_container' data-page=22>

- dryer (n) : m¸y sÊy (realia )

- dish washer (n) : máy rửa bát đĩa ( translation

- electric stove (n): bếp điện ( picture)

 Checking : Rub out and remember

*Dialogue :True / false repetition drill: ( 8’)

-T has some sentences: some T or some F

-T reads the sentence:

a. There are some chairs.

b. There is a TV.

c. There is a bed.

d. There is a sink.

e. There is a shower.

f. There is a washing machine.

* Deliberate mistakes: ( 8’)

- Ask ss to look at the kitchen picture on p.30.

- T reads: This is the picture of a kitchen. The T.V

is next to the refrigerator. There is a washing

machine between the dish washer and the electric

stove. There is a dining table with 5 chairs. Beside

the washing machine is a tub.

+ Answer key: television--> dishwasher ;

washing machine--> sink

tub--> dryer

+ Questions: ( 5 )

’

a. They talk about living room, bathroom and

kitchen.

b. Because Lan’s room is bright.

c. There are a sink, a tub and a shower.

d. There is washing machine, dryer....

* Chain game: A3 on p.31.( 6’)

- Ask ss to work in group of 5 to talk about the

furniture in picture.

Ex: S1: there is a television. S2: there is a

television in the ling room. There is a cat...

4.Consolidation: ( 3’)

- Teacher says the content of the dialogue

again, retell the ways to use “There is / There

are”.

5. Homework:( 1’ )

- Learn by heart the new words.

- Do exercise 1 (p.13- work book).

- Rewrite words.

- Ss listen to the teacher.

- If sentences are true, ss will

repeat.

- If sentences are false, ss

will keep silent.

- Look at the picture and

listen to the teacher to find

out the right place of things.

Give answer keys

-Work in pair to ask and

answer 4 questions.

- Work in groups of 5

to say: s1-->s2-->s3...

- Retell the main points of

this lesson.

Copy down homework

Teaching date: 17/ 9/2009.

Period 15

Unit 3: at home

Lesson 2: a2.What lovely home

</div>
(23)<div class='page_container' data-page=23>

- Help ss make exclamation: What + a / an + adj + n!

- By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to make complaints and compliments.
- Develop 4 skills; listen, speaking, reading and writing.

B – Preparation:

1. Teacher’s preparation: lesson plan, word cues.
2. Ss’ preparation: books, notebooks.

C- Procedures:

Teacher s activities

’

Ss activities

’

I/ Organization: greeting “Who’s absent today? ”

II.Checking up :

-Ask ss to work in pair: one asks, the other answers

by using: Is there a / an ...? Are there any...? in

the picture on page 31.

- T corrects and gives them marks.

III.New lesson :

1/ Pre – teach:

*Vocabulary: T presents some new words.

- Awful( adj ) = Terrible : kinh khủng, tồi tệ (explanation)
- expensive ( adj ) >< cheap : đắt ( antonym )

- bad ( adj ) >< good : xÊu ( antonym )
- boring ( adj ) : buồn rầu, tẻ nhạt ( example )
- delicious( adj ) : ngon ( translation

)

comfortable ( adj ) : thoải mái ( translation )

convenient ( adj ) : thuËn tiÖn ( translation)

modern ( adj ) : hiện đại ( translation)



Check: matching.

2/ Grammar : Exclamations :

T sets the scene :

Lan Hoa

Hoa: What an awful day!

This is my bedroom.

Lan: What a bright bedroom!

- Rub out and remember dialogue.
 Concept check :

+ Meaning: translate into Vietnamese.

+ Use: to give one’s complaining and compliment.

1’

6’

7’

10’

12’

- Greeting

-Work in pair.

- Listen and repeat in

chorus – individual.

- Copy down.

- Match words.

- Listen and repeat in

chorus- individually.

- Translate

- Give use and form.

</div>
(24)<div class='page_container' data-page=24>

+ Form: What + a / an + adj + n!

+ Pronunciation: falling at the end of the sentence.

3/ Practice: word cues dill.

- T runs through the cues.

* kitchen / amazing * dress / expensive
* restaurant / awful * dinner/ delicious * party / boring

- T and ss correct together

4 / Production : ( writing )

- T hangs 5 cues on the board and ask ss to rewrite what they
have done.

- T walks round and does direct corrections.

IV- Consolidation :

T says again how to make the exclamations :
What + a / an + adj + n !

V- Homework :

Ask ss to do exercise 2 on page 13 – workbook

6’

2’

1’

- Retell the main

points of this lesson

- Copy down

homework.

WEEK 6:

Teaching date: 21/ 9/2009.

Period 16

Unit 3: at home

Lesson 3: b1,2. Hoa’s family

I- The aims and requests:

- Help ss read a text for main ideas, details and job vocabulary.

- By the end of the lesson ss will be able to understand the text and practice how to ask and

answer the questions about the jobs.

- Develop 4 skills: L, R, S, &W.

II- Preparation:

- Teacher’s preparation: lesson plan, cassette, CD, poster.

- Ss’ preparation: books, notebooks.

III- Procedures:

Teacher s activities

’

Ss activities

’

1. Organization: greeting,“ Who’s absent today ?”

2. Checking up + warm up :

T asks ss to say about complaints and compliments

by word cues given :( amazing / living room),

(lovely/ house).

T corrects and gives them marks.

3. New lesson :

A/ Pre- reading :( Vocabulary )

a) Pre – teach: T elicits some new words.

(to) raise : nu«i ( gia sóc) ( translation)

(to) grow : trång ( translation)

(to) take care of : chăm sóc ( situation)

journalist (n) : nhà báo ( explanation)

newspaper (n): tê b¸o ( realia)

hospital (n) : bÖnh viÖn ( situation)

primary school(n) : trêng cÊp II ( explanation)

1’

5’

8’

- Greeting.

- Individual action.

- Listen and repeat in

chorus- individually.

- Copy down.

</div>
(25)<div class='page_container' data-page=25>



Check: Matching.

b) T / F statement prediction :

T asks ss to guess T/ F statement predictions.

1. Hoa’s father is a worker.

2. Her mother does the housework and helps on the

farm.

3. Her sister is ten.

4. Lan’s father takes care of sick children.

5. Her mother is a doctor.

6. Her brother works on a farm.

* T asks ss to give their predictions :

B- While

–

reading :

T lets ss read the text carefully and check them

predictions.

- T asks ss to practice the dialogue in pairs.

- T gets feedback.

1- F ; 2 - T ; 3 - F ; 4 - T ; 5 - F ; 6 – F

* Comprehension questions :

Questions : a-> f – P. 34 ( noughts and crosses)

T introduces the way to play: divide the class into 2

teams.

Ask ss to play in 10 minutes.

a

h

c

e

b

f

i

d

g

g) What does Lan’s father do?

h) Does her mother teach in school?

i) What is her brother’s job?

- T finds the winners.

C- Post

–

reading :

- T asks ss to discuss about Lan’s family, and then ss

have to talk about their family.

IV- Consolidation :

- Retell the content of the lesson: Lan’s family and

ss’ families.

V- Homework :

- Learn by heart the new words.

- Do the exercises B1,2 – P. 15,16 ( Workbook )

-Prepare for next lesson.

6’

5’

10’

7’

2’

1’

- Predict T/ F .

- Give their prediction

- Work in pairs

- Listen & read the

text in silent.

- Work in pairs.

- Play the game in two

teams

- Answer the questions

- Talk about Lan’s

family, their families

- Retell the main

points of this lesson.

- Copy down

homework.

Teaching date: 24/ 9/2009.

Period 17

</div>
(26)<div class='page_container' data-page=26>

Lesson 4: b3,4.Hoa’s family

I- The aims and requests:

- Help ss listen & complete the forms for Tom, Susan & Bill. They know more (comparatives

& superlatives of irregular adjectives & long adjectives).

- By the end of the lesson ss will be able to use comparatives & superlatives of irregular

adjectives fluently, and then they can apply in their life.

- Develop 4 skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing.

II- Preparation:

- Teacher’s preparation: lesson plan, cassette, pictures, CD

- SS’ preparation: books, notebooks.

III- Procedures:

Teacher s activities

’

SS activities

’

1. Organization: - Greeting, Who’s absent today?

2. Checking up & warm up :

- Ask ss to play a game: Guess the jobs.

+ You go to see a person when you have a toothache.
+ This person writes for a newspaper or magazine.

+ Before a house is built, this person draws the plan for it.
+ This person grows vegetables & raises cattle.

.
……

- T corrects & gives them marks

3. New lesson :

A. Revision:

- Ask ss to talk about their families.

Ex: My father is 40 years old. He’s a worker. He works in

a factory…

B. Pre- listening :

*. Pre- teach :- T presents some new words:

+ a high school : trêng năng khiếu ( explanation )

+ a magazine : tạp chí (realia)



Open prediction :

Name Age Job Place of work

Tom 26 teacher at a high school

Susan 19 Journalist for a magazine

Bill 20 nurse in a hospital

- T gets feedback.

C. While

–

listening :

* Ask ss to listen to the T carefully & check their

predictions.

- T gives answer keys.

*PELMANISM :

Greeting

- Guess the jobs

- Work in groups

of 4.

- Perform smth about

their families.

- One by one

- Listen to the T &

repeat

- Read in chorus

- Predict Tom,

Susan , Bill’s ages ,

jobs, places of work

- Work in pairs.

</div>
(27)<div class='page_container' data-page=27>

- T explains the way to play.

a farmer a doctor a teacher a journalist
takes care of

sick people

works on a
farm

writes for a
newspaper

teaches in a
school

- T controls the game.

D. Post

–

Listening :

- Use the grid to talk about Tom, Susan, Bill again :

Eg : Tom is 26 years old. He’s a teacher. He teaches at a

high school.

IV. Consolidation :

-

Retell the content of the lesson: talk about one’s job ; working
place.

V. Homework :

-

Do the exercise B1- P.15 < workbook >

- Learn by heart vocabulary and the main points of this lesson.
- Prepare for next lesson.

- Play the game in 2

teams.

- Do individually

- Retell the main points
of this lesson. Some Ss
to retell.

- Copy down
homework.

- Work individually.

Teaching date: 26/ 9/2009.

Period 18

Unit 3: at home

Lesson 5: b5.Hoa’s family

I- The aims and requests:

- Help ss understand the comparatives and superlatives of irregular and long adjectives.

- By the end of the lesson ss will be able to use the structures and practice fluently.

- Develop 4 skills: L, S, R, and w.

II- Preparation:

- Teacher’s preparation: lesson plan, picture cues, poster, cassette, CD.

- Ss’ preparation: books, notebooks.

III- Procedures:

Teacher s activities

’

Ss activities

’

1. Organization: Greeting, “Who’s absent today?”

2. Checking up :

- Ask ss to change these sentences into negative and

interrogative.

a) Lan works in a factory.

b) My father will go to Halong next summer.

- T corrects and gives them marks.

3. New lesson:

A- Presentation :

1. Pre

–

teach

: T presents some new words.

- empty ( adj) : (nhµ) cha cã ngêi ë (example )

- suitable ( adj) : phï hỵp

(translation)

- expensive ( adj) : đắt

1’

5’

4’

- Greeting

- Do individually

</div>
(28)<div class='page_container' data-page=28>

( antonym )

* Check: Rub out and Remember.

2. Grammar : Model sentences

- T presents :

a) The apartment at number 40 is better than number

30. It’s more expensive than number 30.

b) The apartment at number 79 is the best.

It’s the most expensive.

- T asks ss to repeat.

* Concept check :

- Meaning: translate into Vietnamese.

* Form

:

S1 + be + more + long adjective + than + S2

S + be + the most + long adjective

* Use: Comparatives and superlatives in irregular &

long adjectives.

- Pronunciation :

* Remember : good – better – the best

bad – worse – the worst

* Presentation dialogue :

- Ask ss to listen and read in pairs.

- Call some pairs to read.

3. Practice :

a) Picture drill ( 5 – p. 39, 40).

- T runs through all the picture cues.

- Ask ss to make sentences by using form.

b)- Ask ss to complete the sentences by using word

cues :

+ This ruler / long / that / ruler.

+ Mai / intelligent / Hoa.

c) Comprehension questions :

- T lets ss read the dialogue again and answer the

questions.

* Key :

a) The apartment at number 27 is the cheapest.

b) The one at number 79 is the most expensive.

c) The cheapest will be the best apartment.

4. Production :

- Write the sentences with the superlatives.

a) He / good student / class.

b) Sydney/ big / Australia

IV- Consolidation :

Retell: comparative – superlative.

V- Homework:

- Do the exercise 7 – p. 20< workbook >.

- Learn by heart the model sentences and

vocabulary.

5’

6’

15’

6’

2’

1’

- Listen & repeat

- Copy down.

- Give form.

Copy down

Form and usage.

Work

individually.

Retell and Copy

down.

- Work in pairs.

- Look at the

picture cues &

speak.

- Complete the

sentences.

- Work in pairs.

-Work in pairs

- Do individually.

- Retell the main

points of this

lesson.

Copy down

homework.

WEEK 7:

Teaching date: 28/ 9/2009.

</div>
(29)<div class='page_container' data-page=29>

Language focus 1

I. The aims & requests:

- Help ss consolidate the knowledge that they’ve learnt from Unit 1 to Unit 3.

- By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to understand the structures clearly and do exercises

correctly.

II. Preparation :

1. T’s preparation: lesson plan, poster.

2. Ss’ preparation: book & notebook.

III. Procedures:

Teacher’s activities

time

Ss’ activities

1. Organization: - Greeting. Who’s absent today?

2. Checking up : - Complete these sentences by using words

given :

+ Lan / tall / Hoa

+ Minh / intelligent / Nam

* Key: + Lan is taller than Hoa .

+ Minh is more intelligent than Nam.

- T corrects & gives them marks.

3. New lesson

:

A. Tense : * The simple present tense :

* Form: S + { be + O .

{V(s, es) + O.

* The simple future tense :

* Form: S + will + V + O.

- T asks ss to retell the use.

* Drill: Exercise 1 & exercise 2 p.38.

- T gets feedback.

B. Prepositions of position :

- on : ë trªn

- in front of : ở đằng trớc
- under : ở bên dới

- behind : ở đằng sau
- next to : bên cạnh

* Drill : Do exercise 4 p. 39

- Key: b, It’s in front of the chair.

1’

5’

35’

15 8’

- Greeting

- Do individually

- Copy down &

retell the use.

Work individually.

- Retell

- Listen & check.

- Work

</div>
(30)<div class='page_container' data-page=30>

c, It’s behind the table.

d, It’s next to the bookshelf.

e, It’s on the sofa.

C. Occupations : ( Exercise 6 – p.40 )

- Ask ss to play a game : Lucky numbers

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10 1. L.N 2. a fireman 3. a teacher 4. a farmer

5. a doctor 6. a worker 7. L.N 8. a truck driver

9. L. N 10. a student

- Find out the winner.

4. Consolidation :

- Retell the content of the lesson

5. Homework :

- Re-do all exercises in the notebooks.

- Learn by heart vocabulary and some structure grammar

- Prepare for next lesson.

12’

2’

- Play game in 2

teams.

- Clap their hands.

- Retell the main

points.

- Re-do all the

exercises at home.

- Copy down

homework.

Name: _________________

§20:

TEST

Class: 7_______ English 7

(45’) No 1

Marks Remarks T’s signature Ss’ parents’ signature

I. Choose the best answer:

1. Nice to …… you, Hoa.

a. meets b. happy c. meet
2. She has …… friends in Hue.

a. a few b. a lot of c. some
3. How is everything? - ……….

a. So am I b. Me, too c. OK

4. Her ……. is Pham Thi Hoa.

a. full name b. middle c. family
5. ……… is it from your house to school?

a. How b. How far c. How long
6. I …… call you soon.

a. will b. do c. am
7. Where will we meet? – We’ll …… in front of the movies.

</div>
(31)<div class='page_container' data-page=31>

a. with b. from c. to

II. Put the verbs in bracket into the correct form:

1. Listen! The girl (play)……… the piano.

2. They (go) ………to the English club every Saturday.
3. My father (travel) ………..to Nha Trang next week.
4. Hoa ( live) ………... with her aunt and uncle in Hanoi.

III. Complete the sentences using the present progressive tense:

1. Mai / play / piano / at the moment.

-> _____________________________________________________________.
2. The boys / study / Math / now.

-> _____________________________________________________________.

IV. Complete the sentences. Use the comparatives to make:

a) This ruler / long / that one.

-> ___________________________________________________________.
b) Lan / beautiful / her sister.

-> ___________________________________________________________.

Teaching date: 1/10/2009.

Period 21

Unit 4: at school

Lesson 1: a1,2,4

I.The aims & requests

- Help ss ask for & state the time, talk about school subjects, schedules & regulations.

- By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to listen & talk about the school subjects, schedules & state the time
fluently.

- Develop listening and speaking skills.
II. Preparation:

- T’s preparation: Lesson plan, poster, picture cues.
- Ss’ preparation: book & notebook…

III. Procedures:

T s activities’ Ss activities’
1. Organization: - Greeting, “ Who’s absent today ? ”

2. Checking - up and warm- up :

Revision – A1 – p.42. * NOUGHT & CROSSES
- T explains the way to play this game.

 Eg: S1: What time is it ?
S2: It’s seven o’clock.

7.00 4.15 1.45

8.30 9.40 11.5

6.35 8.25 3.10

- Ask ss to play game in two teams.
3. New lesson :

A. Presentation :

1’
8’

- Greeting

- Play a game in 2

teams.

</div>
(32)<div class='page_container' data-page=32>

* Pre – teach ( Vocabulary )

- Physics ( n ) : m«n vËt lý ( realia )
- Physical education ( n ) : m«n thĨ dơc ( translation )
- Music ( n ) : môn âm nhạc ( explanation)

+ Check :Slap the board Math music physical

education

Geography physics English
* Practice : Picture drill ( A4 – p.43 )

- T runs through all the picture cues.

T – the whole class
Side – side
Open pairs -- > close pairs

- Ask ss to ask and answer questions by using the present continues
tense with Wh – Qs :

Eg : S1 : What is Lan doing ?
S2 : Lan is studying physics.

S1 : What time does Lan have her Physics class ?
S2 : She has her physics class at 8.40.

- T corrects their mistakes & pronunciation.
* Production : A2 – p. 42

- Ask ss to ask and answer about themselves with a partner.
Eg : S1 : What time do you get up ?

S2 : I get up at (6.00) o’clock.
S1 : What time do classes start ?
S2 : ……….

- T corrects their mistakes.
4. Consolidation :

- Retell the content of the lesson: Wh-qs with the present continuous
tense , talk about Lan’s activities , practice saying the time.

5. Homework :

- Learn by heart the new words.
- Do the exercise A1,2 – Workbook.
- Prepare for next lesson.

6’

17’

10’

2’

1’

- Listen & repeat in
chorus, then work
individually

- Play in 2 teams

- Run through the
picture cues.

- Work in pairs

- Retell the content of
the lesson.

- Copy down
homework.

WEEK 8:

Teaching date: 5/10/2009.

Period 22

</div>
(33)<div class='page_container' data-page=33>

Lesson 2: a3, 5

I - The aims and requests:

- Help ss listen for the details and school vocabulary.

- By the end of the lesson ss will be able to remember school vocabulary more . They can

write their schedule correctly.

- Develop 4 skills: S, L, R & W.

II - Preparation:

1- Teacher’s preparation: lesson plan, tape & recorder, posters.

2 - Ss’ preparation: books, notebooks, vocabulary < school; subject >

III – Procedures:

Teacher s activities

’

Time

Ss activities

’

1. Organization: - Greeting.

- Who’s absent today?

- How are you today?

2. Checking up & warm up :

a- Ask ss to ask & answer the questions given.



What are you studying?



What time do you have your English class?

b- Revision: Word square .

- Ask ss to find 11 hidden words about classes.

P I C T U R E S S
H I S T O R Y T T
Y S I C S N H A U
S U X A B S W R D
I M T N I X U T Y
C O H L Y M A T H
A M G E O G R A P
L N C L A S S E S
E D U C A T I O N

- Get feedback :

-> picture, history , math , classes

sixth , mom , start , study

English Geography Music

Physics , Physical education

3- New lesson :

A- Pre- listening :

 Pre – teach : Vocabulary:

T elicits some new words.

+ schedule ( n ) : thêi gian biÓu ( explanation)

+ important (adj ) : quan träng ( translation)

+ fun ( ) : ( translation)

- Check : Rub out & Remember

 Open prediction :

- Ask ss to predict 5 classes Thu has on Wednesday

and Thursday.

1... 2... 3... 4... 5...

B- While – listening :

 Ask ss to check their predictions

Answer keys : 1- English 2- Math 3- Geography

4- Physical education 5- Music

 Comprehension questions :

- Ask ss to answer the questions in pairs :

1. When does Thu have English classes?

1’

8’

3’

4’

11’

-Ss greet

- The monitor answers.

- Ss answer.

- Work in pairs.

- S1 & S2

I’m studying English.

... .

- Play game in 2 teams .

* Answer keys:

-> picture, history , math

, classes

sixth , mom , start ,

study

English

Geography Music

Physics , Physical

education

- Listen to the teacher.

- Repeat in chorus .

- Do individually.

- Listen & check their

prediction.

- Work in pairs to

answer.

1

. On Wednesday &
Thursday.

2. On Wednesday at 8.40, on
Thursday at 9.40.

</div>
(34)<div class='page_container' data-page=34>

2. What time do they start?

3. What other classes does Thu have on Thursday?
4. What’s Thu’s favorite subject? Why?

5. What’s Hoa’s favorite subject? Why?

 A3- P.43 :

Ask ss to listen &fill in the gaps with time and

subject.

Friday

Keys : English : 7.00 Science : 9.40

Geography: 7.50 History : 10.30

Music : 8.40

Saturday

Physical education : 1.00 English : 3.40

Math : 2.40 Science : 4.30

C- Post – list.

IV/ Consolidation:

- Retell the main points of this lesson.

V/ Homework: - Learnt by heart vocabulary and

some structure grammar.

Prepare for next lesson.

7’

2’

Physical education and
Physics.

4. History .It’s interesting &
important.

5. Math. It’s difficult, but
fun .

- Listen & fill in the

gaps < Do individually>

- Do individually.

Eg : English : 3.00

- Retell the contents of

the lesson

- Copy down homework.

Teaching date: 6/10/2009.

Period 23

Unit 4: at school

Lesson 3: a6

I -The aims and requests:

- Help ss read the details and compare an American school with a Vietnamese school.

- By the end of the lesson ss will be able to compare an American school with a Vietnamese

school correctly.

- Develop 4 skills: S, L, R & W.

II- Preparation:

1. Teacher’s preparation: lesson plan, posters.

2. Ss’ preparation: books, notebooks.

III- Procedures:

Teacher s activities

’

Time

Ss activities

’

1. Organization: - Good afternoon !

- Who’s absent today?

2. Checking up & warm up : Revision.

- Hang man --- ( schedule )

--- ( schools )

--- ( classes )

Ask 2 ss to practice with : English – 1.15

Math – 2.05

1’

6’

- Ss greet

- The monitor

answers.

</div>
(35)<div class='page_container' data-page=35>

Corrects and gives them marks

3-New lesson :

A- Pre- reading :

 Pre – teach: vocabulary.

- Presents some new words.

+ a uniform : bộ đồng phục ( example)

+ a break : giờ nghỉ giải lao ( explanation)

+ a cafeteria: quán ăn tự phục vụ ( translation)

+ a snack : món ăn nhẹ ( example)

+ (to) sell : bán ( translation)

 Check : R & R

 True / false prediction: A6 - p.45.

- Ask ss to predict T or F. T hangs a poster.

a- Students do not usually wear school uniform.

b- There are classes on Saturday morning.

c- Students don’t have a break in the afternoon.

d- The school cafeteria sells food to students.

e- The school cafeteria only spends at lunch time.

f- Basketball is an unpopular after school activity.

+ Get feedback :

B- While – reading :

- Ask ss to check their predictions after reading the text

“School in USA”.

+ Answer keys : a- T ; b- F ; c- F; d- T; e- F; f- F

- Grid table with :

Activities

USA

Vietnam

-There is school uniform

- Classes start at....

-The school day ends at....

- There are lessons on

Saturday.

- Students have lunch at school.

x

8.30

3.30/4.0

x

v

7.00

11.00 v

x

- Ask ss to fill in the table with some suitable

information to compare an American school with a

Vietnamese school.

- T corrects.

C- Post – reading :

- Transformation writing : A6- P.45

- Ask ss to write about their school.

Example: - There is usually school uniform in my

school. Our classes start at...

- T corrects ss’ mistakes directly.

4- Consolidation :

- Retell the contents of the text “ School in the USA”

5- Homework :

- Learn by heart the new words.

- Do the exercises : A2,3 – workbook

- Prepare fo next lesson.

5’

4’

5’

9’

12’

2’

1’

English class

at 1.15.

- Listen to the T.

- Repeat in chorus.

- Do individually.

- Rewrite words.

- Ss predict

individually.

a. T/ F b. ... c. ...

d. ... e. ... f. ...

- Check ss predict.

- Copy down keys.

- Read the text again

and then fill

information in the

grid table given by T.

- Work in 2 groups.

- Write about their

school individually.

- Retell the content

of the text.

</div>
(36)<div class='page_container' data-page=36>

ANSWER Key :

§20.test 45’

No1

Teaching date: 12/10/2009.

Period 24.

trả và chữa bài kiểm tra 1 tiÕt sè 1

I -The aims and requests:

- Help ss know about their mistakes.

- By the end of the lesson ss will be able to correct their mistakes well.

- Develop 4 skills: L, S, R & W.

II- Preparation:

1. Teacher’s preparation: keys and marks.

2. Ss’ preparation: test 1.

III- Procedures:

I.(4points)

1. c 2. b

3. c 4. A

5. b 6. a

7. a 8. c

II. (2points)

1. is playing

2. go

3. will travel

4. lives

III. (2points)

1. Mai is playing the piano at the moment.

2. The boys are studying Math now.

IV. (2points)

1. This ruler is longer than that one.

2. Lan is more beautiful than her sister.

WEEK 9:

Teaching date: 12/10/2009.

Period 25

Unit 4: at school

Lesson 4: B1, 2.

I- The aims and requests:

- Help ss read a text to understand the details and practicing library vocabulary; to describe the position of
books in the library.

</div>
(37)<div class='page_container' data-page=37>

- Develop 4 skills: L, S , R & W.
II- Preparation:

1. Teacher’s preparation: lesson plan, pictures and poster.
2. Ss’ preparation: books, notebooks.

III- Procedures:

Teacher s activities’ Time Ss activities’

1. Organization: - Greeting.

- Who’s absent today?
2. Checking up & warm up :

Jumble words

torishy = history hipssic = physics
phygrageo = geography ylogibo = biology
leritarute = literature no teh elft = on the left

3.New lesson :

A- Pre- reading ( Vocabulary)

+ a library : th viện ( explanation)
+ a reference book :sách tham khảo( translation)
+ a dictionary : quyển từ điển ( realia)
+ a reader : độc giả, ngời đọc ( translation)
+ a novel : tiểu thuyết ( translation)
+a rack : giá đỡ ( picture)
+ (to) find : tìm thấy ( explanation)

 Check : Matching
 Pre- questions :

- T gives 2 questions, asks ss to answer the qs :
1) When is the library open?

2) What kinds of books are there in the library?
- T gets feedback.

B- While – reading : Grid < with answer key >
- T gives a grid.

The library

Opening time 7 a. m

Books on the left Math, science books

Books on the right History, geography books, dictionary and literature
in Vietnamese

Books in English Readers novels, reference books and dictionaries

Closing time 4.30 p.m

- Ask ss to fill information in it .

 Comprehension questions : B1 a->g. p.47, 48
- Ask ss to work in pairs in some minutes.

- Call spme pairs to practice aloud.
 Keys :

a. The magazines are on the racks.
b. The newspapers are on the racks.

c. the math and science books are on the shelves on the left .
d. the history and geography books , dictionaries and literature
in Vietnamese are on the shelves on the right .

e. the books in English are at the back of the library.
f. The library opens at 7 a.m .

g. the library closes at 4 p.m .

C- Presentation dialogue : < B2 - P.48>

- T sets the scene new structures :

 Model sentences :

- Where can I find the math books, please?
- Where are the math books?

- They are on the shelves/racks on the left.
 Concept check :

-Meaning: - Tôi có thể tìm sách toán ở đâu ?
- Chúng ở trên những cái kệ ở bên trái .
- Form: Where can + S + find + N , please ?

Where + be + N, please ?

- Use: Cách hỏi và trả lời nơi tìm sách , báo trong th viện .
- Pronunciation: falling at the end of the sentences .

1’

6’

8’

3’

9’

5’

- Greeting.

- The monitor answers
- Ss rearrange the positions
of the letters.

- Go to the bb to write
rightly words in 2 teams

- Listen to the t.

- Repeat in chorus 7 then
individually.

- Copy down.

- Match words .
- Answer the qs
individually.

- Fill individually.

-Work in pairs to ask &
answer the questions

- Listen to the t.
- Repeat in chorally.
- Side – side
- Open pairs
- Close pairs

- Translate into Vietnamese.
- Give form.

</div>
(38)<div class='page_container' data-page=38>

D. Practice :

a. Word cues drill :
- T runs through the cues.

- Call ss practice with the cues given by T.

Music / on the right newspapers / on the racks
Example exchange :

- S1 : Where are the music , please ?
- S2 : They are on the racks on the right .

science books reference books newspapers

magazines readers biology books

novels history books dictionaries

E. Production: Written exercise.

- Ask ss to write sentences about their school library, using the
library vocabulary.

Example :My school library opens at.... .The math books are on
the shelves on the left... .

- T corrects indirect.
4. Consolidation :

- Retell the questions and answer in presentation dialogue.
5. Homework :

- Learn by heart new words.

- Do the exercises B1 < P.14- workbook >.

6’

5’

1’

- Run through all the cues.
- Practice in exchange.
T -> the whole class
Side – side

Open pairs
Close pairs

- Play game into 2 teams

- Do individually

- Retell

- Do the exercises at home

Teaching date: 13 / 10 / 2009.

Period 26.

Unit 4: at school

Lesson 5: B3, 4.

I. The aims and requests:

- Help ss describe the position of books in the library by using preposition of position “ at the back / front ; on
the left / right ; in the middle ”.

- Help ss read a detail and further practice in comparatives and superlatives.

- By the end of the lesson ss will be able to describe position of books correctly and practice in comparatives,
superlatives well.

- Develop 4 skills: L, S, R & W.
II. Preparation:

1. Teacher’s preparation: lesson plan, tape, recorder, poster.
2. Ss’ preparation: books, notebooks.

III. Procedures

:

Teacher s activities’ Time Ss activities’

1. Organization :- Good afternoon!
- Who’s absent today?
2. Checking up & warm up :

3. New lesson :

A- Pre- listening :
a. Slap the board :

- Share the class into 2 teams to play game.

b. Pre – teach : Vocabulary

+ ( to) receive : nhËn ( antonym)
+ ( to) contain : bao gåm , cã ( translation)
+ employees (n):nhân viên ( example)

c. Open prediction :

- Ask ss to look at the picture < B3- P.48 >and guess what
books are on the racks and shelves

1’

4’

3’

- Ss answer

- play game in 2 teams.

- listen and repeat in
chorus-individually

- copy down.

- predict in 3 groups.

on the
right

in the
middl
e
at the

back
at the

</div>
(39)<div class='page_container' data-page=39>

< 2,3, 4+ 5 ; 6 +7 >.

B- While - listening : Grid

- Ask ss to listen to the CD 3 times, & then fill the Grid.
- Ask ss to compare with their prediction.

 Answer key :

2.Science and math 4+5 .Newspapers & magazines
3. Geography,

History 6+7. English

N Guess Listen

1 Study Center

2
3
4+5
6+7

8 Library’s desk

-T gets feedback &gives answer key.

C- Post – listening: Write it up .

- Ask ss to write sentences about the position of books in the
library, using the grid.

Example: there are science and math books next to the
Geography books.

D- Pre- reading: True / False predictions < B4-P.49 >.
- Ask ss to guess T or F.

1. The library of Congress in New York.
2. It receives copies of all English books.

3. There are over 100 million books in this library.
4. The shelves are about 300 km long.

5. 500 people work in the library.

- T gets feedback : 1- F; 2- F; 3- T; 4- F; 5- T
E- While- reading :

 LUCKY NUMBERS :( Qs a->e.B4 - P.49 )
- T guides the way to play this game.

1- d ; 2 – LN ; 3 – e ; 4 – b ; 5- LN ; 6- a ; 7 – c
 Answer key:

a. It’s in Washington DC, the capital of USA.
b. It has over 100 million books.

c. It has about 1000 km of shelves.
d. Over 5.000 people work there.

e. Because it receives copies of all American books.

F- Post – reading :

- Ask ss to compare their school library with the library of
Congress.

Yr school

library The library ofCongress

1. smaller v

2. more modern v

3. has more books v

4. has shorter bookshelves v

5. more employees v

6. largest v

- Write - it – up :

Example: My school library is smaller than the Library of
Congress.

4-Consolidation :

- Retell some prepositions of position: “at the back / front; on
the right / left ; in the middle” ; the content of reading “ The
library of Congress ”.

5- Homework :

- Write some more sentences from the table in Post – reading.
- Learn by heart new words.

2’

10’

5’

4’

8’

6’

- listen to the tape 3 times to
fill.

- write it in individually.

-Predict T or F in
individually.

- give their predictions

-play game in 2 teams

- say out and put tick in the
grid.

- Do individually

- Retell the main points of

this lesson.

- Copy down homework
- Write it at home.

</div>
(40)<div class='page_container' data-page=40>

revision

I. The aims and requests:

- Help ss consolidate the knowledge that they’ve learnt.

- By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to do exercise by using form correctly.

II. Preparation:

T : lesson plan, poster.

Ss : text books , notebooks.

III. Procedures:

T’s activities

Time

Ss’activities

1. Organization:

* Greeting.

- Who’s absent today?

- What is the date today?

- How are you to day?

2. Checking up :

Checking in the new lesson.

3. New lesson :

A. Present progressive tense :

- Ask ss to retell form and use.

* Form : (+) S + be + V-ing.

(- ) S + be – not + V-ing.

(? ) Be + s + V-ing ? - Yes, S + be + V-ing.

- No, S + be-not + V-ing.

*

Use

: Diễn tả hành động đang diễn ra ngay tại thời

điểm nói.

Eg : They / lean / English now.

+ They are leaning English now.

- They are not leaning English now.

? Are they leaning English now?

Yes, they are.

No, they are not / aren’t.

* Make sentences by using words given :

a, Lan / read / newspapers.

b, My family / have lunch / now.

c, You / listen to music / at present.

d, I / do / the housework.

B. Time

:

- Ask ss to ask and answer about the time.

* Form:

 What time is it ?

 What is the time? * Note : a quater :

15’

 It is + giê + o’clock. a half

: 30’

1’

4’

15’

11’

10’

- Ss answer

- retell form and

use.

- Give and Copy

down some old

structure.

- Look at on the bb

and do the same.

-Do exercises.

- Work in 4 groups.

- T – class

side – side

open pairs –

close pairs.

</div>
(41)<div class='page_container' data-page=41>

+ giê + phót

Giờ hơn: + phót + past + giê

Giờ kém + phót + to + giê



Word cues drill :



a, 3.15 / 11.40 / 6.30 . b, 4.20 / 7.35 / 5.15.

C. Prepositions of position

:

- Ask ss to describe their house by using :

on the left : bên trái

on the right ; bên phải

at the back of :ng sau

Eg: There is a well at the back of my house.

4. Consolidation :

- Retell the content of the lesson.

5. Homework :

- Do exercises 2, 3 on p.34, 35 – workbook.

- Learn by heart vocabulary and some old structure

grammar.

- Prepare for next lesson.

3’

2’

- Write a short

paragraph in

individually.

- Retell the main

points of the

lesson.

Copy down

homework.

Week 10.

Teaching date: 19 / 10 / 2009.

Period 28.

Unit 5: Work and play

Lesson 1: a1, 3. (p.51 - 52)

I. The aims and requests:

- Help ss understand and remember school subjects & learn how to talk about recess activities.

- By the end of the lesson ss will be able to understand the text and practice fluently.

- Develop 4 skills: S, L , R & W.

II. Preparation:

1. Teacher’s preparation: lesson plan, posters.

2. Ss’ preparation: books, notebooks.

III. Procedures:

Teacher’s activities

Time

Ss’ activities

1. Organization:

* Greeting: - Who’s absent today ?

2. Checking up :

- Ask ss to ask and answer what they are doing.

- Ss have to talk about school subjects.

- T corrects and gives them marks.

3. New lesson :

A- Presentation :

1’

4’

- Ss answer.

</div>
(42)<div class='page_container' data-page=42>



Pre- teach :

- T elicits some new words :

+ ( to) learn about : học về ( translation)

+ ( to) use : dùng , sử dụng ( explanation)

+ How to use : cách dùng nh thế nào ( translation)

+ ( to) be interested in : yêu thích ( example)

+ ( to) do an experiment : làm thí nghiệm(explanation)

+ last (adj / adv ) : cuối cùng ( example)

+ Computer science : môn tin học ( example)

+ a map : bản đồ ( realia)



Check : Matching



A1 < P.51 >

a) The text :

1. Which school does Mai go to ?

2. What does Mai study at school?

3. What time do her classes start and finish?

b) Model sentences :

- T elicits the model sentence :

T : What does Mai study in her Computer science class?

+Form

:

What +do/does + S+ study/learn+ in (her) + m«n häc ?

S +Vs /es + how to / about...

- Ss : She learns how to use a computer.

- Ask ss to practice :

T -> the whole class ; side -> side ; open -> close pairs

+ Read the text again & fill in the grid :

Classes

What to do

Computer science

learn how to use a computer

Geography

study maps & learn about different

countries

Physics

do some experiments

B. Practice :

Word cues drill :

- T runs through all the cues :

 Mai / Physics class / do some experiments

 They / Geography class / learn about maps.

 You / music class / learn how to sing song.

 He / English class / learn how to speak English.

C. Production :

- T gives some pictures with word phrases.

- Ask ss to use form asking and answering.

+ Picture 1: physics class / do some experiments.

+ Picture 2: Science class / learn how to use a computer.

+ Picture 3: Geography class / learn about maps and

different countries.

4. Consolidation:

- Ask ss to retell how to say what smb to do in their class.

5. Homework:

- Do ex1 p.27-workbook

- Writing :- Write about your study at school :

eg : I study at Duong Duc school. In my Physics class i

learn about...

8’

4’

5’

10’

5’

2’

1’

- Listen and repeat

chorus

individually

- copy down

- match words

- Predict the answer

individually.

- Listen and repeat

- practice in

exchange

- read the text and

fill in the grid in

groups of 5.

- Run through the

cues.

- Practice in

exchange

- Look at the

pictures – practice

in pairs.

- Retell the main

points of the

lesson.

- Copy down

homework

</div>
(43)<div class='page_container' data-page=43>

Teaching date: 20/ 10 / 2009.

Period 29.

Unit 5: Work and play

Lesson 2: a2. (p.51-52)

I. The aims and requests:

- Help ss read the text about Ba then practice the questions given.

- By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to read and understand the text, practice asking and

answering the qs about Ba fluently.

- Develop 4 skills: L , S , R & W.

II. Preparation :

T: Lesson plan, poster , picture.

Ss : book , notebook .

III. Procedures :

T s activities

’

T

Ss activities

’

1. Organization: - Good afternoon !

- Who’s absent today?

2.Checking up :

- Ask ss to ask and answer the qs :

 What do you study in your Computer science

class ?

 What do you learn in your English class?

- T corrects and gives them marks.

3. New lesson :

A. Pre reading :

* Pre teach : T elicits some new words:

 (to) repair : Sửa chữa (máy móc) ( picture )

 (to) fix : lắp , lắp đặt ( picture )

 (to) enjoy : yêu thích ( synonym )

 (to) be good at :giái vÒ ... g× ( translation )

 electronics (n) : ®iƯn tư ( translation )

art club (n) : câu lạc bé ( explanation )

* Check : Matching

* T / F statement predictions :

- Ask ss to guess true or false.

1. Ba enjoy his school very much .

2. His favorite subject is electronics.

3. In this class. He does some experiments.

4. He isn’t good at fixing things.

5. He can help his parents at home.

6. He never goes to art club.

- T gets feedback.

B. While - reading :

a, Ask ss to give their predictions:

* Answer key :

1-T ; 2-T ; 5-T

3-F : He learn to repair household appliances.

4-F : He is good at fixing things.

6-F : He goes to art club after school.

1’

4’

8’

4’

20’

- Ss answer .

- s1 asks – S2

answers.

- Listen and

repeat in chorus

and individually

- copy down

- Match words.

- Predict T / F in

individually

</div>
(44)<div class='page_container' data-page=44>

b, Comprehension questions : LUCKY NUMBERS.

- Ask ss to play a game in 2 teams.

1.a

2.LN

3.c

4.b

5.d

6.e

C. Post reading :

- Ask ss to practice with qs : f,g,h p.48 in pairs.

- T corrects.

4. Consolidation :

- Retell some information about Ba.

5. Homework :

- Do the exercise A1 ( workbook )

- Read A5 (*) and odd one out.

- Learn by heart all the new words.

5’

2’

1’

- Play a game in 2

teams.

- Retell the main

points of the

lesson.

Copy down

homework

Teaching date: 22/ 10 / 2009.

Period 30.

Unit 5: Work and play

Lesson 3: a4, 6. (p.51 - 52)

I. The aims and requests:

- Help ss listen and match the subjects with some pictures.

- By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to listen and read the names of subjects well then

practice them fluently.

- Develop 4 skills: L, S, R & W.

II. Preparation:

1. Teacher’s preparation: lesson plan, picture, poster.

2. Ss’ preparation: books, notebooks.

III. Procedures:

Teacher s activities

’

Time

Ss activities

’

1. Organization: - Good afternoon!

-Who’s absent today?

2. Checking up :

- Ask ss to read the text and answer the

questions :

a) Does Ba enjoy his school?

1’

5’

- Greeting

- The monitor

answers.

- Read the

text.

</div>
(45)<div class='page_container' data-page=45>

b) Is he good at electronics?

c) Does he play the guitar?

- T corrects and gives them marks.

3. New lesson :

A- Listening :



Pre- listening: Prediction.

- Ask ss to predict what subjects Ba / Hoa has

on Saturday morning.

- Ask ss to write the names ( Ba and Hoa ) next to

the picture .



While

–

listening

:

- Let ss listen and check their prediction.

- Ask ss to get feedback and give answers :

* Keys: Ba : d , a, e ; Hoa : c, b, e .

B- Reading :



Pre- reading :

* Pre-teach :

- T elicits some new words :

+ an essay : bài luận / bài văn (translation)

+ calculator : m¸y tÝnh ( realia)

+ an event : sù kiÖn ( translation)

+ past and present events :

* Matching: A6- P.55.



Open prediction :

- Ask ss to predict the subjects that will

appear in the text.



While- reading : A5- P.55

- Let ss read the text and check their

predictions.

- Comprehension questions :

a) What do you study at school?

b) What do you learn in literature?

c) Do you study past and present events in

history?

d) What subjects do you learn about different

countries and their people?

e) Do you speak English in language class?

f) What other things do you study?



Post

–

reading

: Nought and crosses.

Ask ss to play game in 2 teams.

History

language

Art

Physics

Computer

science

Math

Literature

Electronics

Geography

- Find out the winner.

4. Consolidation :

- Retell some names of subjects.

5. Homework :

- Learn by heart new words at home.

- Do all the exercises in workbook.

- Prepare for next lesson.

3’

10’

4’

3’

10’

7’

1’

questions

individually.

- Predict

individually and

write.

- Listen

carefully and

check.

- Match in

groups

-Predict

individually.

- Read in

groups.

- Answer the

questions in

pairs.

</div>
(46)<div class='page_container' data-page=46>

1’

-Retell the

main point of

the lesson.

- Copy down

homework.

Week 11.

Teaching date: 26/ 10 / 2009.

Period 31.

Unit 5: Work and play

Lesson 4: B1, 2.

I. The aims and requests:

- Help ss ask about and describe recess activities.

- By the end of the lesson ss will be able to know more about some activities at recess, and

then they can describe recess activities well.

- Develop 4 skills: S, L, R & W.

II. Preparation:

1. T: lesson plan, pictures, posters.

2. Ss: books, notebooks.

III. Procedures

Teacher s activities

’

Time

Ss activities

’

1. Organization:- Greeting ; Who’s absent today?

2. Checking up and warm up :Shark attacks

- Find out the team winners.

3. New lesson :

A- Pre- listening (reading)

- T elicits some new words by using some pictures &

other techniques.

+ ( to) chat : t¸n gÉu ( picture)

+ ( to)play catch : chơi đuổi bắt ( picture)

+ ( to)play marbles : chơi bắn bi ( picture)

+ ( to)skip rope : chơi nhảy dây ( mime)

+ noisy (adj ): ån µo >< quite ( synonym)

+ ( to)play blind mans bluff :chơi bịt mắt bắt dê

( picture)

* Check : R & R

+Networks :

eating

chatting

play games

-Ask ss to net some words to talk about some

activities at recess.

B- While- reading :

- T reads the text and gives the answers < Networks >

a) Questions: Ask ss to ask and answer the questions

1’

5’

3’

- Greeting.

- Play game in 2

teams A&B

-Listen & repeat in

chorus –

individually.

- Guess the meaning

- Copy down

activities

at recess

- Rewrite words.

- Do individually.

Activities

</div>
(47)<div class='page_container' data-page=47>

after guessing the answers.

- Play a game : Lucky number

1

2 3*

4

5

6

7

8 9*

1- a. What time do ss have a recess?

- They have recess at 9.25.

5- b. Do they eaten drink at recess? – Yes, they do.

2- d. What are the boys playing?

- They’re playing marbles.

8- e. What are the girls playing?

- They are skipping rope.

4- f. What is the most popular activity – It’s talking.

7- c. Do they play soccer at recess? – No, they don’t.

3 , 9 - > Lucky Number

b) B2- P.57: Listen and match each name to an

activity.

C- Post- reading :

-Ask ss to listen 3 times, and then match.

Mai

a. playing catch

Kien

b. playing marbles

Lan

c. skipping rope

Ba

d. playing blind man’s bluff

4. Consolidation :

- Ask ss to retell some activities at recess with the

present progressive tense.

5. Homework :

- Ask ss to learn by heart all the new words.

- Writing : < the answers – Part b . P. 57 – B1>.

- What do you and your friends often do at recess?

Begin: At my recess I often ... and Hoa ...

17’

10’

2’

1’

- Guess the answers.

- Play game in 2

teams

- Listen to the tape.

- Matching

- Retell in

individually

Copy down

homework

Teaching date: 27/ 10 / 2009.

Period 32.

Unit 5: Work and play

Lesson 5: b3,4.

I. The aims and requests:

- Help ss learn how to talk about the activities at recess continue.

- By the end of the lesson ss will be able to understand the text and practice fluently.

- Develop 4 skills: S, L , R & W.

II. Preparation:

</div>
(48)<div class='page_container' data-page=48>

2. Ss: books, notebooks.

III. Procedures:

Teacher s activities

’

Ss activities

’

1. Organization: - Good afternoon! Who’s absent

today?

2. Checking up :

- Ask ss to read the text and answer the questions :

a) Are there any activities for recess?

b) What are they?

3. New lesson :

A. Revision: Bingo.

- Let ss write 5 activities at their recess.

- T reads: play catch / play soccer / play volleyball /

play marbles / play blind man’s bluff / play

basketball / skip rope / read / talk to friend/ drink

and eat/ listen to music / meet friends.

B. Presentation :



Pre- teach < Vocabulary >

- T elicits some new words.

+ Junior high school : trờng THCS ( example)

+ Senior high school : trờng THPT ( example)

+ ( to)score a goal : ghi bàn ( translation)

+ ( to) swap : trao đổi ( translation)

+( to) relax : giải lao ( example)

+ ( to) take part in : tham gia / tham dự (translation)

* Check : Rub out and Remember



Pre- reading: Prediction.

- Ask ss to predict the answers :

Qs: What do ss in American schools do at recess?

* Gets feedback :



While

–

reading

: Multiple choice

- Let ss read the text and check their predictions.

* Multiple choice :

- Let ss read and do.

- T gets feedback and gives answers :

* Answer keys :

a- C ; b - A ; c- B ; d- D



Post

–

reading

: Discussion.

-Talk about what you often do at recess.

* Answer the questions: - What is the most popular

recess activity in your school?

C. Survey :

- Ask ss to ask three people and put the tick in each

column.

Activities

Name soccer catch Skip

rope Marbles read talk Drink/eat

lan v v v

4. Consolidation :

1’

5’

6’

5’

2’

1 5’

8’

2’

- Greeting

- 2 ss go to the bb to

read & answer the

qs

- Write 5 sentences

(activities) at recess.

- Listen & tick, say

“ Bingo”

- Listen & repeat in

chorus- individually

- Copy down.

- Rewrite words.

- Predict

individually

Ex: play volleyball,

eating... .

- Read & check

- Read and do.

- Listen and check

- Free talk.

- Discuss in 4

groups.

- Say out their

opinions.

- Go around the

class and ask their

friends.

</div>
(49)<div class='page_container' data-page=49>

- Retell the names of some activities at recess.

5. Homework :

- Ask ss to learn by heart vocabulary.

- Do the exercises < B1-3 – Workbook >

1’

- Do the exercises at

home.

- Copy down

homework.

Teaching date: 29/ 10 / 2009.

Period 33.

Unit 6: After school

Lesson 1: a1

I. The aims and requests:

- Help ss listening and understand about the text. They can practice with their partner.

Learn how to talk about popular after school activities.

- By the end of the lesson ss will be able to ask and answer with “How often... ?” by

using adverbs of frequency “ always , usually , often, sometimes ... never ” fluently.

- Develop 4 skills: speaking and writing.

II. Preparation:

1. Teacher’s preparation: lesson plan, picture, poster

2. Ss’ preparation: books, notebooks.

III. Procedures:

Teacher s activities’ Time Ss activities’

1. Organization : - Good afternoon!
- Who’s absent today?
2. Checking – up :

- Two Ss to rewrite voca.
- Ask ss to do Ex B2(31)

- T corrects mistakes & gives them marks.
3. New lesson :

I/ Pre-teach :

*Vocabulary:

- should: (v) nªn (trans)

- Cold drink(n): Đồ uống lạnh (explain)
- Good idea! ý kiÕn hay( explain)

-Practices everyday: lun tËp hµng ngµy(explain)
- Together(n): cïng nhau (trans)

1’
4’

6’

- Greeting
- Work in pairs

- work in 3 groups of 4

- Copy down new
words.

</div>
(50)<div class='page_container' data-page=50>

- Volleyball(n): bóng chuyền (explain)
- Team(n): đội(example)

- Come along…đến với
- May be: có lẽ.

* Check: matching.
* Pre-listening:

- T. hang a picture on the board(pic in the ELbook)

- Ask Ss look at the pic and guess about contents of the text.
II/ While –listening:

- T. read the text – Ss listening

- Asks Ss read again and check their prediction.
 Comprehension questions :

- Play a game: “ lucky number”

 1d / 2LN / 3e / 4b / 5LN / 6a / 7f / 8c.
 Answer keys:

a) She is doing her math homework.
b) They are going to the cafe ..
c) He is in the music room.

d) He is learning to play the guitar.
e) Minh usually meet his friends
f) She enjoys playing volleyball.
 Post- listening:

- Do Ex A1(33) in workbook.
- T. corrects their mistakes.
4. Consolidation :

- Retell the content of the lesson: the activities after school.

5. Homework :

- Ask ss to write Ba’s activity after school.
- Do all ex

- Learn by heart vocabulary
- Copy down homework

15’

10’

2’

1’

- Look at the picture
Ss listening

- Look at the picture
and guess the main
contents of the
text.

- Write individually.
Ss & T correct together

- Answer the
questions.

- Work in two teams
- Retell individually
- Write about Ba at
home

- Do all ex

Learn by heart voca
- Copy down

homework

Week 12.

Teaching date: 2/ 11 / 2009.

Period 34.

Unit 6: After school

Lesson 2: a2

I. The aims and requests:

</div>
(51)<div class='page_container' data-page=51>

- By the end of the lesson ss will be able to ask and answer with “How often...?” by using

adverbs of frequency “always, usually, often, sometimes ... never” fluently.

- Develop skills: speaking and writing.

II. Preparation:

1. Teacher’s preparation: lesson plan, picture, poster

2. Ss’ preparation: books, notebooks.

III. Procedures:

Teacher s activities’ Time Ss activities’
1. Organization: - Good afternoon! Who’s absent today?

2. Checking – up :

- Ask ss to practice questions < a -> f – P.61>
- T corrects mistakes & gives them marks.
3. New lesson :

A- Revision: Slap the board.

- T reads the Vietnamese words, ss slap the English ones.
( Bơi , xem T.V , chơi trò chơi điện tử , chơi bóng đá , đi xem
phim , đọc sách )

*Labeling: A2 – P.61.

- Ask ss to look at the activities and label the pictures in 3
groups.

 Keys : 1. Reading / studying in the library
2. swimming

3. play video games
4. going to the movies
5. playing soccer

6. watching T.V

B- Practice : Noughts and Crosses

- Ask ss to play a game in 2 teams by using words or phrases
given.

always/go
swimming

often/ go to the zoo never/ go to the
library

usually/play
soccer

sometimes/ play
computer games

often / go/ movie
usually/ watch

T.V

often/ play tennis sometimes/ do the
housework

Example: S1: What do you usually do after school?
S2: I usually watch T.V.

C- Further practice : Write it up

- Ask ss to write the answers :

Qs: How often do you study in the library after school?
Eg: I always study in the library school after school.

1’
4’

6’

15’

10’

- Greeting
- Work in pairs

- Play game in 2 teams

- work in 3 groups of
10

- Ss to look at the
activities and label the
pictures in 3 groups.

- Copy answer keys

- play game in 2 team

</div>
(52)<div class='page_container' data-page=52>

...
- T corrects mistakes and gives them marks.

4. Consolidation :

- Retell the content of the lesson: the activities after school.
5. Homework :

- Ask ss to write Ba’s activity after school.

- Learn by heart vocabulary and main structure grammar.
- Prepare for next lesson.

2’

1’

- Retell the main point
of this lesson. Work
individually

- Write about Ba at
home

Teaching date: 3/ 11 / 2009.

Period 35.

Unit 6: After school

Lesson 3: a3, 4(p. 62)

I. The aims and requests:

- Help ss understand a text for details about pastime activities.

- By the end of the lesson ss will be able to understand the content of the text well, they

can ask and answer the questions given exactly.

- Develop 4 skills: S, L, R & W.

II. Preparation:

1. T: lesson plan, poster, pictures, tape, recorder.

2. Ss: books, notebooks.

III. Procedures:

Teacher s activities

’

Time

Ss activities

’

1. Organization: - Good morning! Who’s absent

today

2. Checking – up: Make questions and answers.

a- go to the zoo / sometimes

b- play soccer / always

- Ask 2 ss to ask and answer.

- T corrects and gives them marks.

3. New lesson :

A- Pre- reading :



Pre- teach: T elicits some new words.

+ sporty ( adj) : thuéc thÓ thao ( translation)

+ comic ( n) : truyÖn tranh (example)

+ president(n): ngời đứng đầu, thủ lĩnh(translation)

+ ( to)collect : su tập ( translation)

+ a collection : bé su tËp ( translation)

+ ( to) rehearse : diÔn tËp ( translation)

* Check : What and where



True / False prediction :

- Ask ss to predict T or F

1. Nga , Ba , Nam are students in class 7A.

2. They like sports very much.

3. Nga’s favorite pastime is jogging.

4. Ba likes collecting stamps.

5. Nam plays soccer every afternoon.

1’

5’

9’

5’

- Greet

- go to the bb to ask

and answer by using

qs given.

- Listen to T

- Guess the meaning

- Repeat in chorus-

individually

- Copy down

- Predict T or F

individually

</div>
(53)<div class='page_container' data-page=53>

6. Nam usually watches T.V.

- T gets feedback.

B. While- reading: A3- P.62.

- Ask ss to read the text and check their guess.

- T gets feedback and gives key :

1 -T ; 2 - F ; 3- F; 4- T ; 5 - F ; 6- T



Comprehension questions : LUCKY

NUMBERS

- Ask ss to play a game in 2 teams

1 – a ; 2 – b; 3 – c ; 4 – LN ; 5- d ; 6- LN

* Keys :

a- her group is rehearsing a play for the school

anniversary celebration.

b – He gets American stamps from Liz, his

American friend.

c- The stamp collector’s club meets on Wednesday

afternoon.

d- Nam never plays games.

C- Post

–

reading

: A4- P.63

* Matching :

- Ask ss to listen and match each name to an

activity:

Mai – go to the school cafeteria

Nam – rehearse a play

Ba – go to the circus

Lan – watch movie

Kien – tidy the classroom

- T corrects

4. Consolidation :

- Retell the contents of the lesson: talk about the

activities of somebody in pastime.

5. Homework :

- Ask ss to do exercise 4 - < workbook >

- Learn by heart vocabulary.

- Write a short paragraph about after school

activities using the matching < A4- P.63 >

5’

7’

8’

2’

1’

- Guess their

predictions

- Play game in 2

teams to choose the

number; then answer

the qs

-Find out the team is

winner

- Listen and match in

2 groups.

- Say out their

listening

Ss to listen and

match each name

to an activity.

- Retell the contents

of the lesson

- Copy down

homework.

- Do the exercise at

home individually

Teaching date: 5/ 11 / 2009.

Period 36.

Unit 6: After school

Lesson 4: b1 (p. 64)

I. The aims and requests:

- Help ss make suggestions with “Let’s / What about ...?/ Why don’t you ....?”

</div>
(54)<div class='page_container' data-page=54>

II. Preparation:

1. Teacher’s preparation: Lesson plan, poster, word cues.
2. Ss’ preparation: books, notebooks.

</div>
(55)<div class='page_container' data-page=55>

Week 13.

Teaching date: 9/ 11 / 2009.

Period 37.

Unit 6: After school

Lesson 5: b2

( page 65)

I . The aims and requests:

- Help ss read a magazine survey about the most popular activities of American teenagers and getting
further practice in leisure vocabulary.

- By the end of the lesson ss will be able to understand the contents of the reading exactly.
- Develop 4 skills: L, S, R, W.

II. Preparation:

1, T’s preparation: lesson plan, poster, pictures.
2, Ss’ preparation: books and notebooks.

III. Procedures:

T’s activities Ss’activities

1. Organization: - Goodmorning!
- Who’s absent today?
2. Checking up :

- Call ss make a suggestion : * Let’s / come back / Hoa’s
house

* What/ rehearse / a play.
- T corrects and gives them marks.

3. New lesson :
 A. Pre – reading :

* Vocabulary: - T elicits some new words.

- teenager ( n ) thiếu niên từ 13- 19 tuổi ( example)
- musical instrument ( n ) nhạc cụ ( translation )
- scout ( boy scout ) hớng đạo sinh ( translation )
- guide ( girl guide ) hớng dẫn viên ( explanation )
- ( to ) attend : tham gia, tham dự ( translation )
* Check : What and where

* Open prediction :

- Ss predict what American teenagers like to do in their free time.

B. While – reading :

- Let ss read B2-p.65 and check their prediction.
* Comprehension questions :

1’

5’

7’

3’

- Ss answer

- S1 asks – S2
answers.

-Listen and repeat in
chorus , individually
- Copy down.

-Rewrite words.
- Predict individually.
- Read B2-p65 in
group.

</div>
(56)<div class='page_container' data-page=56>

- Asks ss to answer the questions in pairs.

1. Which of these activities in the list of American teenagers do
you think are also popular among Vietnamese teenagers?
2. Are there many kinds of entertainment for teenagers in Viet
Nam? What are they?

3. What organizations are there for teenagers in Vietnam?
- Get feedback.

*Answer key :

1. Watch TV , listen to music , go to the movies help old people.
2. Ss’ answer.

3. Young Pioneers or different kinds of clubs for children.
C. Post – reading : Discussion :

- Asks ss to ask their friends what they like doing in their free
time and make a list of their group’s favorite leisure activities in
groups of four.

4. Consolidation :

- Retell the content of the lesson: talk about what American
teenagers like to do in their free time.

5. Homework :

- Do the exercise B1,2 in workbook .

- Learn by heart the new words.
- Prepare for next lesson.

18’

8’

2’

1’

- Work in pairs.

- Look at the pictures
and give the short
answer.

- Discuss in groups of
four.

- Retell the main points
of this lesson

- Do the exercise B1,2
at home.

- Copy down
homework.

Teaching date: 10 / 11 / 2009.

Period 38.

</div>
(57)<div class='page_container' data-page=57>

Lesson 6: b3, 4.

( page 66)

I/ The aims and requests:

- By the end of the lesson ss will be able to understand the structures and practice them correctly.
- Help Ss listen to and understand detail about dialogue. They can read, listen and practice with their
partner, make similar dialogue.

- Develop 4 skills: S, L, R & W.

II. Preparation:

1. Teacher’s preparation: Lesson plan, poster, word cues, CD, cassette.
2. Ss’ preparation: books, notebooks.

III. Procedures:

Teacher s activities’ Time Ss activities’
1. Organization: - Good morning!

- Who are absent today?
2. Checking – up :

- Call 2Ss to rewrite words.

- Two others answer the questions. B1 (64)-b,c & d,e.
- T corrects and gives them marks.

3. New lesson :

*/ Revision: : “Hangman”
+ Restaurant: _._._._._._._._._._.
+ Teenager: _._._._._._._._.
* Cues: 1) Nơi để đến ăn uống.

2) Là những người trẻ tuổi,lứa tuổi từ 15-25.
-T gives answer keys.

I/ Presentation:

1.Preteach:

- I’d love to = I would love to: toi thich lam
- After lunch: Sau bữa ăn trưa.

- Pleasure: Niềm vui thích, điều thú vị.
- Wedding (n): Đám cưới.

- Thank anyway: Dù sao cũng cảm ơn bạn.
- You‘re welcome: có gì đâu.

- I’m not sure: Mình không chắc lắm.
- That’s too bad: tiếc quá.

- Community service: Sự phục vụ cộng đồng.
* Check: Matching.

2. Presentation dialogue:

- Asks Ss listen to the radio (3times).
- Asks Ss work with their partners.
- T gives model sentences

* Model sentences:

+ Would you like to…..?

I’m sorry, I can’t

I’d love to. But I’m busy…

Thanks for inviting me.

II/ Practice:

- Ask some Ss read dialogue again.
- Work in groups of 4. Then discuss.

- T. corrects their mistakes and explains for Ss

1’
5’

5’

13’

15’

8’

- Greet.

- Read individually

-Play a game:
“HANG MAN”

- Listen & repeat in chorus
- individually

- Listen to T.

- Repeat in chorus-
individually

- Copy down

- Give meaning & form

- Copy down.

- To go to the board to
matching

- Ss listen to the radio
(3times).

- Ss work with their
partners.

- Practice in exchange.
T ->the whole class.
side -> side

open-> close pairs

Ss read dialogue again
- Work in groups of 4.

</div>
(58)<div class='page_container' data-page=58>

understand.

- T gives questions:

1/ How do some teenagers help the community?
2/ How do Vietnamese teenagers help the
community?

-Asks Ss discuss.

-T corrects their mistakes.

III/ Post-listening:

 Open dialogue:

- Asks Ss make a dialogue the similar this
dialogue.

A: Would you like to come to my home for dinner?
B: I’m not sure. I’ll call you later.

A: Ok.

B: Thanks for inviting me.
A: It’s my pleasure.
…

4. Consolidation :

- Retell the main points of this lesson.

5. Homework :

- Ask ss to learn by heart new words.
- Ask ss to do exercises in workbook.
- Prepare for the next lesson.

2’

1’

- Ss make a dialogue
the similar this
dialogue.

- Work in pairs.

- Retell the main points of
the lesson.

- Do the exercises at home
- Copy down homework.

Teaching date: 12 / 11 / 2009.

Period 39.

Unit 6: After school

Language focus 2

I. The aims and requests:

- Help Ss consolidate the knowledge that they’ve leant from unit 4 to unit 6:

* Present continuous tense. / * This, that, these, those

* Time and subjects. / * Adverb of frequency.

- By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to remember the structures and do exercises

correctly.

II. Preparation:

1.T: lesson plan , posters , pictures

2.Ss: book and notebook.

III. Procedures:

</div>
(59)<div class='page_container' data-page=59>

1. Organization : - Good morning !

- Who’s absent today?

2. Checking up : - Ask Ss to answer this question :

What are they doing?

- T corrects and gives them marks.

3. New lesson :

A. Present Progressive tense :

* Form:

* S + be + V-ing.

* S + be-not + V-ing.

* Be + s + V-ing?

* Use: Dùng để diễn tả hành động đang xảy ra ngay tại thời
điểm nói .

- Thêng ®i víi: now, at the moment , at this time, at

present,..

* Eg : Lan / watch TV / at the moment

--> Lan is watching TV at the moment.

- Ask ss to do exercise 1 p.68.

- Gets feedback :is doing / is writing / is reading / is

cooking/

Are playing / is kicking / is running.

B. This and that / These and those :

- This :đây ( chỉ đồ vật / ngời ở gần )

- That :kia ( chỉ đồ vật / ngời ở xa )

This / that + n + is...

- These : chỉ nhiều ngời / đồ vật ở xa

- Those : chỉ những ngời / những đồ vật ở xa

These/ those + Ns + are...

- Ask ss to complete the dialogue in pairs.(ex 2p.68 )

* Answer key :

b. Mom: .... that... c. ...these...

Son: That... this... – These ...?

Those ...

d. Mom :... these...

Son : ...those...

C. Adverbs of frequency :

- always / usually / often / sometimes / seldom /

never.

- Ask ss to do ex 5 p. 71 : write about Ba

eg : Ba never goes to the cafeteria at lunchtime .

D. Time : Cách hỏi và trả lời về giờ :

What time is it ? - It + phút + to + giờ.( giờ kém )

- It + giờ + phút . ( giờ hơn )

- It + giờ + o’clock. ( giờ đúng )

- Ask ss to write the correct time and then practice

*Ex 3 p. 69 :

* Key ; b. seven fifteen. / c. ten thirty.

1’

4’

5’

10’

5’

- Ss answer.

-S1 asks – s2

answers.

- Retell form &

use

- Do exercise 1

p.68 the same

Example.

- Retell and take

notes.

- Work in pairs.

- Retell the

meanings.

- Write about Ba

in individually.

</div>
(60)<div class='page_container' data-page=60>

d. six forty five / fifteen to seven .

E. Vocabulary : Name of subjects :

- Ask ss to write the correct subject names :

Chemistry English

History Math

Geography

G. Making suggestions :

- Let’s + V....

- Would you like + to-V... ?

- Should we + V ... ?

- Responses: - Ok . / I’d love to .

- I’m sorry, I can’t .

- Ask ss to write down possible dialogues.

Eg: Lan : Let’s go swimming.

Hoa : Ok .

Minh: Should we play table tennis?

Nam: I’m sorry, I can’t.

Ba: Would you like to play basketball?

Nga: I’d love to .

4. Consolidation :

- Retell the contents of the lesson.

5. Homework :

- Learn by heart vocabulary and some structures

grammar.

- Do the exercise 6 p.7

- Prepare for next lesson.

8’

2’

1’

- Write

individually, then

work in pairs.

Ss do

individually

- Retell form

Making

suggestions

Practice in

pairs

Ss to write

down

possible

dialogues.

Retell the

main points

of this lesson.

</div>
(61)<div class='page_container' data-page=61>

Week 14.

Teaching date: 16 / 11 / 2009.

Period 40.

WRITTEN TEST 2 ( 45’)

Period 40 - ENGLISH 7

A/ The aim and request:

To check Ss’ progress and Ss’ understanding.

To evaluate Ss’ level.

To help Ss focus on learning tasks.

B/ Preparation:

1. Teacher’s questions

2. Ss’ consolidation

C/ Proceduce:

Đề và đáp án trong ngân hàng đề.

Teaching date: 17/ 11 / 2009.

Period 41.

Unit 7: The world of work

Lesson 1: a1.Student’s work

</div>
(62)<div class='page_container' data-page=62>

I. The aims and requests:

- Help ss practice comparatives with “fewer / more” to talk about ss’ work.

- By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to understand the new structures and practice them

fluently.

- Develop 4 skills: L, S , R & W.

II. Preparation:

1. T: lesson plan, posters, word cues.

2. Ss: book & notebook.

III. Procedures:

T’s activities

T

Ss’ activities

1. Organization: - Good morning!

- Who’s absent today?

2. Checking up & warm up : No

3.New lesson :

A. Presentation :

* Pre teach : - T presents some new words :



an hour : 1 tiÕng ( example )



( to ) last : kÐo dµi ( translation )



hard ( adj ) : vÊt v¶ ( explanation )



late --> later :muén,muén h¬n ( explanation )



early--> earlier :sím,sím h¬n ( explanation )



few--> fewer : Ýt , Ýt h¬n ( explanation )



many--> more :nhiÒu , nhiỊu h¬ ( explanation )

* Check

: Ro & Rm

+ Pre questions prediction ( p.73 ):

1. What time do Hoa’s classes start and finish?

2. Do your classes start earlier or later?

3. For how many hours a day does Hoa do her

homework?

4. Do you work fewer or more hours than Hoa?

Get feedback.

+ Presentation dialogue ( A1 on p.72 ) :

Let ss listen and check their predictions.

Let ss listen again and give model sentences :

My classes start earlier than Hoa’s classes.

I work fewer hours than Hoa.

+ Concept check :

- Meaning: Líp häc cđa t«i häc sím h¬n líp cđa Hoa.

Thời gian làm của tôi ít hơn so với Hoa.

- Form:S1+Vs,es +(earlier / later / fewer / more)+ than

+S2

- Use: C¸ch nãi so s¸nh h¬n.

- Pronunciation :

B. Practice : Word cues drill

- T runs through all the cues.

- Ask ss to give the comparatives.

a) Hoa’s classes : 7.00 }( start )

Our classes : 6.45 }

b) The film : 8.45 } ( finish )

The play: 10.00 }

c) Hoa : 2 hours } ( work )

1’

8’

6’

7’

11’

- Ss answer.

- Listen &

repeat in chorus

– individually.

- Copy down .

- Rewrite words.

- Ss predict

individually.

- listen and give

their predictions

- listen & repeat

after T .

- translate into

Vietnamese.

- give form

- say out the

use.

</div>
(63)<div class='page_container' data-page=63>

Miss Lan: 4 hours }

Eg : S1: Hoa’s classes start later than our classes .

S2: I work fewer hours than Hoa .

C. Production :

+ Make sentences comparing their work with Hoa’s

work, using “earlier/ later / fewer / more”.

4. Consolidation

:

- Retell the contents of the lesson: the way to make the

comparative sentences with “more / fewer / later /

earlier”.

5. Homework :

- Do ex 1 – work book.

-Learn by heart vocabulary and new structure grammar.

- Prepare for next lesson.

10’

1’

-Write

individually

- Retell the main

points of the

lesson.

- Copy down

homework.

- Do ex 1 at

home.

Teaching date: 19/ 11 / 2009.

Period 42.

Unit 7: The world of work

Lesson 2: a2, 3.

Student’s work

I. The aims and requests:

- Help Ss read for details to compare American Ss’ vacation and Vietnamese Ss’ vacation.

- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to understand the content of the letter, remember the names of the
public holiday.

- Develop 4 skills: L, S , R & W.

II. Preparation:

1. T: lesson plan, pictures, poster.
2. Ss: books and notebooks.

III. Procedures:

T s activities’ T Ss activities’

1. Organization: - Good morning!

- Who’s absent today?

2. Checking up :

- Call ss say out the right sentences.

a) She works ( hard ) than her sister.
b) I work ( few ) hours than Hoa.
- T correct and give them marks.

3. New lesson :

A. Pre reading :
* Pre teach :

- T presents some new words :

 ( to ) celebrate :kỉ niệm ( example )
 Easter : lễ phục sinh ( explanation )
 Thanks giving : lễ tạ ơn ( explanation )
 New year’s Eve :đêm trớc ngày giáng sinh ( trans )
 Independence Day :ngày quốc khánh ( example )
 Christmas :giáng sinh ( translation )

1’

3’

6’

-Ss answer

- Say out
individually

- Listen and repeat
in chorus -

individually

- Copy down

</div>
(64)<div class='page_container' data-page=64>

*Check : What & Where.

* T/F statements prediction : ( A2 p.73 )
- Ask ss to predict these sentences are T or F.

1. Vietnamese ss have fewer vacations than American students.
2. American ss have the longest vacations in the winter.

3. They don’t have a Tet holiday.

4. Their most importance vacation is New Year’s Day.
5. They usually spend their time with their families on

Thanksgiving and Christmas Day.

- Get feedback: 1.. 2.. 3.. 4.. 5..
B. While reading :

- Ask ss to read the text and check their predictions :
1.T 2.F 3.T 4.F 5.T

- Ask ss to read the text again and fill in the grids :

Vacations Vietnamese ss American ss
longest vacation in the summer in the summer

Tet holiday v x

Thanksgiving x v

Christmas x v

Independence Day September 2nd July 4th

Easter x v

New Year’s Eve Lunar December

30th January 1st

C. Post reading :( A3 p.74 )

- Let ss look at the pictures and guess the name of the public

holiday in each picture

.

- Let ss listen and check their predictions.

* Answer key :

a) Thanksgiving.
b) Independence Day.
c) New Year’s Eve.
d) Christmas.
 4. Consolidation :

- Retell content of the lesson: the name of some especial days
of the year.

5. Homework :

- Do ex 2 in the workbook.
- Remember the new words
- Prepare for next lesson.

5’

15’

13’

1’

words

- Guess T or F in
individually

- Give their
predictions

- Read the letter in
groups and check.

- Read the letter
again and fill

- Listen

individually and
check their
prediction

- Retell- do the ex2
at home.

</div>
(65)<div class='page_container' data-page=65>

Week 15.

Teaching date: 23 / 11 / 2009.

Period 43.

Unit 7: The world of work

Lesson 3: a4.

I. The aims and requests:

- Help Ss read for details about a typical student’s life.

- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to understand the text and practice fluently.

- Develop 4 skills: L, S, R & W.

II. Preparation:

+ T: lesson plan, text book, cassette, poster.

+Ss: text book, notebook.

III. Procedures:

T s activities

’

T

Ss activities

’

1. Organization

: - Good morning!

- Who’s absent today?

2. Checking up :

- Ask Ss to practice the qs : a,b,c – p74.

- T correct and give them marks.

3.New lesson :

A. Pre reading :

* Pre teach : - T elicits some new words :

+ Period ( n ) : tiết học example

+ Typical ( adj ): điển hình,tiêu biểu. translation

+ Keen ( adj ):nhạy bén , sắc sảo. translation

+ Lazy ( adj ):lời biếng synonym

+ ( to ) review :nhắc lại. translation

+ Definitely ( adj ): chắc chắn , nhất định. translation

* Check: R & R

* Prediction :

- Ask ss to guess the amount of time Hoa spends on her

work.

1, Hoa goes to work ... days of week.

2, She has ...period a day.

3, She works ...hours a week.

4, She has about ... hours of homework every week.

5, Before tests she works ... hours a week.

- Get feedback.

1 ... 2 ... 3... 4... 5...

B. While reading :

- Let ss read the text and check their predictions.

* Answer key :

1, 6 2, 5 3, 20 4, 12 5, 45.

* Comprehension questions : LUCKY NUMBERS

- T presents the way to play this game. Then share the class

into 2 teams.

1.a 2. LN 3.e 4.f 5.c 6.LN 7.b 8 d

Qs: a--> d on p.75.

e. Does Hoa have to work at home?

1’

5’

8’

4’

18 ’

-Ss answer

- S1 asks- S2

answers.

- Listen & repeat

in chorus –

individually.

- Copy down.

- Rewrite words.

- predict

individually.

- Read the text –

check their

predictions.

</div>
(66)<div class='page_container' data-page=66>

f. Do you work fewer or more than Hoa?

* Key :

a. Because they don’t know Ss have to work hard at school

and at home.

b. She works about 20 hours a week. Yes, it is.

c. Ss answer.

d. No, she doesn’t.

e. Yes, she does.

f. Ss answer.

- Find out the winner.

C. Post reading :

Question and answer ( Orally )

1. What do you think of a student’s life?

2. Do you think students are lazy?

4. Consolidation :

- Retell the contents of the lesson.

5. Homework :

- Learn by heart all the new words.

- Do the exercise 3,4 – workbook.

- Prepare for next lesson.

6’

2’

1’

- Answer the

questions.

- Retell the main

points of this

lesson.

- Copy down

homework.

- Do the exercise

at home.

Teaching date: 24 / 11 / 2009.

Period 44/

Trả và chữa bài kiểm tra

I/ The aims:

- Help Ss know their mistakes and then correct them.

- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to avoid some typical mistakes.

II. Preparation:

T: Key and points.

Ss: Test.

III. Procedures

:

1. Organization:

2’

- Good morning!

- Who’s absent today?

2. Warm up:

3. New lesson: ( 30’ )

- T asks ss to look at their tests.

- T and ss correct together: KEY & MARK.

I. 3 points:

</div>
(67)<div class='page_container' data-page=67>

II. 5 points:

1. go

2. plays

3. are learning

4. does your sister travel…

5. will writing

III. 2 points:

1. Long is a student in class 7A.

2. He goes to school in the afternoon.

3. Yes, he does.

4. He never plays game.

4. Consolidation: 2’

- Retell some typical mistakes.

5. Homework:1’

- Ask Ss to do ex 3,4 – workbook.

Teaching date: 26 / 11 / 2009.

Period 45.

Unit 7: The world of work

Lesson 4: B1, 4

I. The aims and requests:

- Help Ss read Tim’s letter about his parents’ job and getting further practice in the simple present.
Listening for specific details.

- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to understand the content of the letter easily, listen information
exactly then take notes.

- Develop 4 skills: L, S, R & W.

II. Preparation

:

- T: lesson plan, cassette, CD , poster.
- Ss: book and notebook.

III. Procedures:

T s activities’ T Ss activities’

1.Organization :

- Good morning!
- Who’s absent today?
2. Checking up :

- Ask Ss to ask and answer the questions :
* Is Hoa a hard- working student?

* How many hours does she work a week?
- T correct and give them marks.

3. New lesson :

A.READING

1. Pre reading :

*Pre teach : T elicits some new words

+ ( to ) take care of :chăm sóc. ( explanation)
+( to ) work part – time :lµm nưa ngµy ( translation )
+ ( to ) repair : sưa ch÷a ( explanation )
+ ( to ) play golf :chơi gôn ( example )
+ mechanic ( n ) : thợ máy ( translation )
+ a machine : m¸y mãc ( explanation )
+ shift (n) : ca trùc ( translation )
+ homeless (adj) : vô gia c, ko nhà cửa ( example )
* Check : R & R

1’

4’

7’

3’

- Ss answer.

- S1 asks- S2 answers.

- Listen and repeat in
chorus- individually.
- Guess the meanings.
- Copy down.

</div>
(68)<div class='page_container' data-page=68>

* Ordering ( for main ideas )

- Ask ss to predict the order of the main ideas.
a, Mr Jone’s work.

b, Tim’s introduction of his family.
c, Mr Jone’s vacation time.

d, Mrs Jone’s work.

- Get feedback: 1.... 2... 3... 4... .

2. While reading : B1-p.76

- Ask Ss to read the text carefully.

- Let Ss read it again and check their prediction
* Key : 1.b 2.d 3.a 4.c

* Comprehension questions :

a, She works at home.

b, She cooks lunch for homeless people.
c, He is a mechanic.

d, He usually works about 40 hours a week.

e, They have a great time there and Mr Jone plays more golf.
B. LISTENING

1. Open predictions :

- Ask ss to predict what Peter / Susan / Jane and Phong does and
fill in the “ job ” column in the grid ( B4 p.78 ).

- Get feedback.

Name Job Hours per week Amount of vacation
Peter

Susan
Jane
Phong

2.While listening

- Ask ss to listen and check their predictions.

- Let ss listen again and fill in the grid.
+ Key :

* Question and answer :

- Ask ss to answer the qs in pairs.
a, What’s Peter’s job ?

b, How many hours a week does he work ?
c, How much time does his vacation last ?

3. Post listening – reading :

- Write about you and 4 people: Peter / Susan / Jane and Phong.
Eg : Peter is a doctor . He works about 70 hours a week. He has
4 weeks vacation each year.

- T goes around the class and find some typical mistakes in
their writing then corrects.

4. Consolidation :

- Retell the content of the lesson.

5. Homework :

- Learn by heart all the new words.

- Remember some information about Tim’s family.
- Write about Phong and you.

10’

4’

7’

1’

- Copy down

- Read the text 2 times
and give key.

- Practice in pairs.

- Predict in 4 groups.

- Listen the tape twice.
- Fill in the grid.

- Work in pairs.

- Write about Susan /
Jane in individually.

- Retell the main
points of the lesson..
- Copy down

homework.

- Do the ex at home.

Week 16.

Teaching date: 30 / 11 / 2009.

Period 46.

</div>
(69)<div class='page_container' data-page=69>

Lesson 5: b2,3

I. The aims and requests :

- Help Ss practice comparatives with “ more / less / fewer ”.

- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to understand the text and the structures clearly then practice
fluently.

- Develop 4 skills : L , S , R & W.

II. Preparation:

-T : lesson plan , text book , poster.
-Ss : textbook , notebook.

III. Procedures:

T s activities’ T Ss activities’

1. Organization: - Good morning!

- Who’s absent today?
2.Checking up :

- T calls 2 ss to tell about Jane and Phong.
- T corrects their mistakes and give them marks.
3. New lesson :

A. Presentation :

* Pre teach : T presents some new words :

+ pig (n) : con lỵn (picture)

+ main crop (n): mïa vô chÝnh (example)
+buffalo shed (n): chuång tr©u (explanation)
+ chicken coop (n): chuång gµ (explanation)
+ (to)feed : cho ¨n ( example)

+ (to) rest : nghØ (example)

+ (to) clean : lau chïi,dän dÑp (situation)
 * Check : What and Where.

* Presentation text :B2 p.77

- Let ss read the text about Mr Tuan and using the

information from the table (B4) to fill in the grid (p77).
- T models sentences :

Mr Tuan works more hours than Mr Jones.
Mr Jones works fewer hours than Mr Tuan.
Mr Jones has more vacation time than Mr Tuan.
Mr Tuan has less vacation time than Mr Jones.
- Concept check :

Meaning : translate into Vietnamese

Form :

S +V(s , es) + more/ fewer/ less +N +than + S2
 have/has

Use :So s¸nh hơn với adj ngắn ( more/less/fewer)

(38)
10

- Ss answer.

- Ss retell about Jane and
Phong.

- Listen and repeat in
chorus – individually.

- copy down

- Rewrite words.

- Read the text

individually. Then fill in
the grid.

T- class
side- side
individually

- Give form and use.

</div>
(70)<div class='page_container' data-page=70>

B.Practice : Word cues drill : using the grid in B3 p.77.
- T runs through all the cues.

Eg : I work fewer hours than Hoa.
+ Minh / do exercise / more / Lan

+ She / clean / chicken coop / fewer / her brother.
C. Production : Language focus 3 p.98

- Ss make new sentences about the amount of the food in
the fridge 2,compare with the one in fridge 1.

Eg : There are more eggs in fridge 2 than fridge 1.
There is less milk in fridge 2 than fridge 1.
4. Consolidation :

- Retell the form of the lesson.
5. Homework:

- Learn by heart voca and structures grammar.
- Do all exercises in workbook.

- Prepare for next lesson.

5’

1’

2’

- write the comparatives.

- Retell the main points
of this lesson.

- Copy down
homework.

Teaching date: 1 / 12 / 2009.

Period 47.

consolidation

I. The aims and requests:

- Help Ss consolidate some knowledge: adverbs of frequency, making comparisons that they’ve learnt in
the last periods.

- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to understand the structures clearly and do exercises correctly.

II. Preparation:

-T: lesson plan, textbook, poster.
-Ss: textbook, notebook.

III/Procedures:

T s activities

’

T

Ss activities

’

1. Organization

:

- Good morning!

-

Who’s absent today?

2. Checking up :

- Ask Ss to give the right adj :

T-ll , sho-t , ma- y , g d , f-w , l t-le .— —
*Key: tall, short , many , good , few , little .

- T corrects and gives them marks.

3. New lesson

:

A. Adverbs of frequency: always, usually, often , sometimes ,
never.

* Vị trí : - đứng sau : to be “ ”

- đứng trớc : ordinary verbs “ ”
Eg : I always go to school on Monday .
She is never late for school.

Drill : Đặt trạng từ vào đúng vị trí trong câu :
- Ask ss to do it in groups of 5.

1. We play soccer in the street. ( never )

1’

6’

17’

- Ss answer

- Ss do individually

- Ss retell

</div>
(71)<div class='page_container' data-page=71>

2. My father is busy on Sunday. ( always )
3. He sends me a present. ( sometimes )

4. They don’t go swimming in the winter. ( often )
5. What do you do at recess? ( usually )

B . Comparisons : Adjectives

- Let ss retell forms and then do exercise in groups.
a) S1 + be + short – adj + er + than + S2.

more + long – adj + than + S2.

b) S1 + V(s/es )+ more / fewer / less + n + than + S2.
have / has

c)S1 + be + the + short-adj_ est .
most + Long-adj.
* Note : good – better – the best
bad - worse the worst

* Drill :Cho dạng so sánh thích hợp của tính từ trong ngoặc :
1. Nam is (tall) than his sister.

2. Mr Tan works (many) hours than my father.
3. He drinks ( little ) wine more than Mr Hai

4. VN students have (few) vacations than American students.
5. Summer vacation is the (long) vacation.

- T gets feedback.
* Answer key :

B. 1. taller 2. more 3. least
4. fewer 5. longest.

1. ... never play...
2. ...is always...

3. ... sometimes sends ...
4... ofen go ...

5.What do you usually do... ?
4. Consolidation :

- Retell the forms and some main points.
5. Homework :

- Learn by heart vocabulary and some structures grammar .
- Do exercise B1,2 – workbook.

- Prepare for next lesson.

18’

2’
1’

- Ss retell

- Work in groups.

* Answer key : 
B. 1. taller
2. more
3. Least

4. fewer
5. longest.
A.

1. ... never play...
2. ...is always...
3. ... sometimes sends
....

4... ofen go ...
5.What do you usually
do... ?

- Retell the main point
of the lesson.

-Do the ex B1,2 at
home.

Teaching date: 3/ 12 / 2009.

Period 48.

</div>
(72)<div class='page_container' data-page=72>

Lesson 1: a1, 3 (p.79-80)

I. The aims and requests:

- Help Ss understand and remember the names of places; learn how to ask for and give

directions.

- By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to ask for and give directions.

- Develop 4 skills: S, L, R & W.

II. Preparation:

1. Teacher’s preparation: lesson plan, picture and posters.

2. Ss’ preparation: books, notebooks.

III. Procedures:

Teacher s activities

’

T

Ss activities

’

1. Organization: - Good morning!

- Who’s absent today?

2. Checking up :

3. New lesson :

A.Presentation :

* Pre- teach: T elicits some new words.

+ National Bank of Vietnam( n ): Ngân hàng Quốc Gia Việt Nam

+ HaNoi railway station ( n) : Ga Hµ Néi ( picture )

+ Dong Xuan Market (n):Chợ Đồng Xuân ( picture )

+ Saint Paul Hospital (n):Bệnh viện Sanhpôn ( picture )

+ The Central Post-office (n):Bu điện trung tâm ( picture )

+ Souvenir shop (n):Cửa hàng bán đồ lu niệm ( example )

* Check: matching: - Ask ss to mach the places to the pictures.

* Presentation text : ( A2 p.80 )

- T presents the situations of the text then give the model

sentences :

Qs: Could you (tell/ show ) me ( the way / how ) to get there ?

Ans: - Go straight ahead. Take the first street.

- Go straight to the first street .Turn right.

* Concept check :

- Meaning : translate into Vietnamese

- Form: Hái :

Could you + tell/show + me + how/the way+ to...?

Trả lời :- Dùng các giới từ chỉ vị trí để chỉ dẫn:

- Go straight ahead/ Turn left/right/ Opposite, in front of...

- Use: Cách hỏi đờng và trả lời.

- Pronunciation: falling at the end of the qs and ans.

B. Practice : * Brainstorm

:

In front of behind opposite on the right

on the left near next to between

* Picture Drill : A3 p.81:

- Let Ss look at the street map and practice speaking :

Eg: S1: Could you tell me the way to the bank ?

S2: Ok. You go straight ahead. Take the first street. The

bank is between the hotel and the restaurant. It’s opposite the

hospital.

1’

9’

5’

20 ’

- Ss answer.

- Matching.

- Listen and

repeat.

- give

meaning.

- give form

and use.

- do

</div>
(73)<div class='page_container' data-page=73>

C. Production :

- Ask Ss to listen and write the places:

Eg: The school is opposite the bookstore...

4. Consolidation :

- Retell the form: asking for and giving directions.

5. Homework :

- Do ex 4 – workbook.

- Learn by heart all the new words.

- Prepare for next lesson.

8’

1’

- Listen and

write the

right places.

- Retell the

form.

- Copy down

homework.

Week 17.

Teaching date: 7 / 12 / 2009.

Period 49.

Unit 8: PLaces

Lesson 2: A4,5.

I. The aims and requests:

- Help Ss to further practice with “How far ...?” to talk about distance.

- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to understand the content of the dialogue, talking

about the distance with “How far...?” fluently.

- Develop 4 skills: L, S, R & W.

II. Preparation:

1. Teacher’s preparation: lesson plan, poster, CD, cassette.

2. Ss’ preparation: book, textbook.

III. Procedures:

Teacher s activities

’

T

Ss activities

’

1. Organization: - Good morning!

- Who’s absent today?

2. Checking up :

- Ask 2 ss to practice with this answer :

* Could you tell me the way to get to the bank?

- T corrects and gives them marks.

3. New lesson :

1’

4’

</div>
(74)<div class='page_container' data-page=74>

A. Presentation :

*Pre teach : - T presents some new words:

+ a long way : một quãng đờng dài.

+ It takes (time) to get there: đến đó thì mất khoảng

thời gian...

Eg: It takes a long way from here. It’s takes about 18

hours to get there by coach.

B. Practice :

* Predict dialogue (A4 p.82):

- Let ss look at the poster and fill in the blanks :

Lan : You’re from Hue. How far is it from Ha Noi ?

Hoa : It’s a long way. It’s taken about 18 hours to get

there by coach. I think It’s about (1)_ .

Lan : And how far is it from Ho chi minh city ?

Hoa : About (2) .

- Let ss listen to the dialogue carefully and then

check their predictions.

* Answer key : 1) 680 km 2) 1,030 km

* Mapped dialogue :

Lan Hoa

Vinh ... Ha Noi 319 km

Hue ... Ha Noi 688 km

Da Nang ... Ha Noi 791 km

HCM city... Ha Noi 1,726 km

* Eg :

S1 : How far is it from Vinh to Ha Noi ?

S2 : It’s about 319 kilometers .

...

C. Production :

- Ask ss to practice in pairs ,using the street map (a)

and the table (b) in ex 2.L.F 3 on p.96 to give a

directions.

Eg :

S1 : Could you tell me how to get the park ?

S2 : Go straight ahead . It’s next to hairdresser’s.

S1 : How far is it from the shoe store to the park ?

S2 : It’s ...

- T goes around the class and correct the typical

mistakes.

4. Consolidation :

- Retell the way to ask and answer the distance with

“How far..?”

5. Homework :

- Learn by heart all the new words and the structures.

- Do ex 2(b)– L.F 3 – p.96.

4’

17’

16’

2’

1’

- Listen and repeat

after T in chorus

then individually.

- Predict

individually.

- Listen to the tape

3 times.

- Check their

predictions.

T - Ss

side- side

Open pairs

Close pairs

- Practice in pairs.

- Retell the

structures.

- Write a

conversation about

giving directions at

home.

</div>
(75)<div class='page_container' data-page=75>

Teaching date: 8 / 12 / 2009.

Period 50.

Unit 8: PLaces

Lesson 3: b1 (p83)

I. The aims and requests:

- Help Ss understand the content of the dialogue, then practice to ask and answer the price.

- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to listening the conversation between Liz and

clerk well then they practice to ask and answer the Qs carefully.

- Develop 4 skills: L, S, R & W.

II. Preparation:

1. Teacher’s preparation: lesson plan, cassette, CD, poster.

2. Ss’ preparation: textbooks, notebooks.

III. Procedures:

Teacher s activities

’

T

Ss activities

’

1. Organization: - Good morning!

- Who’s absent today?

2. Checking up :

- Ask Ss to read their writing.

- T corrects and gives them marks.

3. New lesson :

A. Pre

–

listening

:

* Pre teach :

- T presents some new words :

+ envelope (n) : phong b× ( realia )

+ stamp (n): tem ( realia )

+ (to) send a letter : göi th ( example )

+ (to) mail a letter : göi th ®iƯn tư ( explanation )

+ (to) cost : chi phÝ ( explanation )

+ change (n): tiỊn lỴ, tiỊn thõa ( example )

* Check: What and Where.

* True / False predictions :

1. Liz’s like to send a letter to the Great Brighton.

2. She needs some envelopes.

3. They’re 2,500 dong.

4. The stamps for her letter costs 9,00 dong.

5. The envelopes and the stamps are 11,500 dong.

- T gets feedback.

B. While

–

listening :

- Ask Ss listen to the dialogue and check their

predictions.

* Answer key : 1,F 2,T 3,F 4,F 5,T

* Lucky numbers :

- Let ss play the game in 2 teams.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Qs :

1. Where is the nearest Post office ?

2. L. N

3. Where will Liz mail her letter to ?

1’

4’

7’

6’

17’

- Ss answer

- Do individually.

-Listen and repeat

in chorus –

individually.

- Copy down

- Rewrite words.

- Predict

individually.

- give their

predictions.

- Listen and

check.

- Play a game in 2

teams.

</div>
(76)<div class='page_container' data-page=76>

4.How much is the letter to the USA ?

5. How much does the envelopes Liz need ?

6. LN

7. how much does Liz pay altogether ?

8. How much change does Liz have ?

- Find out the winners.

C. Post

–

listening

: Answer about you :

d, Where is your nearest post office ?

e, How do you get there from your house ?

Eg : - My nearest post office is about 500 meters from

my house... .

4. Consolidation:

- Retell the content of the lesson: the way to ask about

the price.

5. Homework:

- Learn by heart all the new words.

- Practice speaking.

- Prepare for next lesson.

7’

2’

1’

- Answer the qs

by writing.

- Retell the main

points of the

lesson.

- Copy down

homework.

- Remember.

Teaching date: 10/ 12 / 2009.

Period 51.

Unit 8: PLaces

Lesson 4: b2 (p84)

I. The aims and requests:

- Help Ss read a dialogue to understand the details then practice in “need / would like” and

post office vocabulary.

-By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to understand the dialogue and practice in “need /

would like” fluently.

- Develop 4 skills: L, S, R & W.

II. Preparation:

1. Teacher’s preparation: lesson plan, posters, realia.

2. Ss’ preparation: textbooks, notebooks.

III. Procedures:

</div>
(77)<div class='page_container' data-page=77>

1. Organization: - Good morning!
- Who’s absent to day?
2. Checking up :

- Ask 2 Ss to ask and answer the Qs :

1. How far is it from your house to the post office?
2, How can you get there?

- T corrects and gives them marks.
3. New lesson :

A. Pre reading :

* Pre teach : - T presents some new words :
- a local stamp : tem địa phơng ( example )
- writing pad (n): giấy viết th ( realia )
- phone card (n) : thẻ gọi điện thoại ( realia )
- overseas mail (n):th gửi ra nớc ngoài

(example)

* Check: Slap the board.
* Open prediction :

- Let Ss predict three things Hoa wants from the post
office.

- Gets feedback.
B. While reading :

- Ask Ss to read the text carefully.

- Read it again and check their predictions.
 * Answer key : Hoa needs :

 Some local stamps

 Some stamps of overseas mail.
 A phone card.

* Comprehension questions ( a-->c p.84 )

- Ask Ss to work in pairs asking and answering the Qs.
a, She need some local stamps and some stamps for
overseas mail.

b, Because she has a pen pal in America.

c, Because she wants to phone her parents once a week.
- T corrects their mistakes.

C. Post reading :

- Ask ss to write a letter to their close friend to talk about
their families.

4. consolidation :

- Ask ss to retell the contents of the dialogue.
5. Homework :

- Complete their writing.

- Learn by heart all the new words.

1’

4’

5’

2’

23’

7’

2’

1’

- Ss answer

-S1 asks –S2 answers

-Listen and repeat in
chorus-individually.

- Copy down.

- Play a game in 2
teams.

- Predict individually.

- Read the dialogue in
pairs.

- Check their
predictions.

- Work in pairs.

- Do individually to
write a letter.

- Retell the main points
of the lesson.

</div>
(78)<div class='page_container' data-page=78>

Week 18.

Teaching date: 14 / 12 / 2009.

Period 52

Unit 8: PLaces

Lesson 5: b 4 - 5.

I. The aims and requests:

- Help Ss listen for the details then further practice in post office vocabulary and telling the

price.

-By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to understand the dialogue and practice in post

office and tell the price fluently.

- Develop 4 skills: L, S , R & W.

II. Preparation:

1. Teacher’s preparation: lesson plan, posters, realia.

2. Ss’ preparation: textbooks, notebooks.

III. Procedures:

T s activities

’

T

Ss activities

’

1. Organization: - Good morning!

- Who’s absent today?

2.Checking up :

- Ask Ss to ask and answer the Qs given :

a, How far is it from your house to school ?

b, How can you get there ?

- T corrects and gives them marks.

3.New lesson :

A. Pre listening :

* Open prediction (B4-p.85)

- Let Ss look at the picture B4 and predict what

Mrs. Robinson will buy...Then predict how much

she spends on each of these five items.

- Gets feedback.

B. While listening

:

- Ask Ss to listen carefully.

- Ask Ss to listen again and check their

1’

4’

- Ss answer.

- Work in pairs.

- Predict in

individually.

</div>
(79)<div class='page_container' data-page=79>

prediction about the order.

* Answer key : 1, envelopes 2, a pen

3, a writing pad 4, stamps 5, a phone card.

- Ask Ss to listen again and check the price.

* envelopes : 2,000 d * a pen : 1,500 d
* a writing pad :3,000d * stamps : 500 d / each
* a phone card : 50,000d

- Ask Ss to answer the questions :

a, what is the total cost ?

b, How much change will Mrs. Robinson have

from 60,000 ?

C. Post listening : B5-p.85

- Ask Ss to practice speaking in pairs.

- Gets feedback and corrects.

4. Consolidation:

- Ask Ss to retell the content of the lesson: how

to say the price.

5. Homework:

- Revision all the grammar and vocabulary that

you’ve learnt.

- Prepare for next lesson.

21’

13’

1’

- Check their

predictions

-Do in 2 groups.

a, The total cost is

59,000d.

b, She’ll have 1,000 in

change.

- Work in pairs.

-Retell the main points

of this lesson.

- Copy down

homework

Teaching date: 15 / 12 / 2009.

Period 53

consolidation

I. The aims and requests:

- Help Ss review all the tenses, prepositions, adverbs of frequency and question words.

-By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to understand the structures clearly and do exercises correctly.
- Develop 4 skills: L, S, R & W.

II. Preparation:

1. Teacher’s preparation: lesson plan, posters.
2. Ss’ preparation: textbooks, notebooks.
III. Procedures

:

T s activities’ T Ss activities’

1. Organization: - Good morning! 
 - Who’s absent today?

I. Tenses:

1.Present simple tense:

- Ask Ss to retell form and use :

* Form: - TO BE (+) S + am/is/are + O.

(- ) S + am/is/are – not + O.
(?) Am/Is/Are + S + O?
- ORDINARY Verbs :

(+) S + V(s/es) + O.

(- ) S + don’t / doesn’t + v + O.

10’

</div>
(80)<div class='page_container' data-page=80>

(?) Do / Does + s + V + O?

* Drill : Put the verbs into the correct tense :

a, Lan ( be ) a student .
b, They (be) a farmer ?
c, We ( play ) soccer .

d, She always ( skip role ) in her free time.
e, Nam ( watch ) TV .

f, Hoa and I ( go ) to the post office.
- Gets feedback :

a, is b, Are they....? c, play d, skips rope e, watches f, go
2. Present continuous tense :

(+) S + to be + V-ing + O.
(-) S + be-not + V-ing + O.
(?) Be + S + V-ing + O ?

- Use: Dùng để diễn tả hành động đang diễn ra ngay tại
thời điểm nói.

- Thờng đi với các từ : now , at present , at the moment ,
look, listen ....

* Ask ss to give some examples.
3. Future simple tense:

(+) S + will/shall + V + O.
(- ) S + will/shall-not + V + O.
(?) Will / Shall + S + V + O?

- Use :Dùng để diễn tả hành động sẽ xảy ra trong tơng
lai.

* Drill : Change into (- ) and ( ? ) :

a, Lan goes to school everyday .

b, My father will go to Ha Noi next Sunday.
c, They are listening to music .

- Ask ss to do exercise.
- T gets feedback :

a, Lan doesn’t go to school everyday.
Does Lan go to school everyday?

b, My father will not go to Ha Noi next Sunday.
Will your father go to Ha Noi next Sunday?
c, They are not listening to music.

Are they listening to music?
 II. Question words :

o How much :hỏi giá tiền( N ko đếm đc ), giá tiền.
o How many : hỏi về số lợng( N đếm đợc ).

o How far : hỏi khoảng cách.

o How long :hỏi về khoảng thời gian, chiều dài.
o Could you tell/show me the way to...?:hái ®g ®i.
 III. Preposition of the place :

o on : ở trên .
o opposite: đối diện

o between ... and ...: giữa ... và ...
o from ... to ...: từ ... đến ...

IV. Adverbs of frequency :

 always ( vvvvv ): lu«n lu«n .
 usually ( vvvv ) : thêng thêng.
 ofen ( vvv ) : thêng hay .

 sometimes ( vv ) : thØnh tho¶ng.
 seldom ( v ) : hiÕm khi .

 never ( - ) : không bao giờ.
* The position: Đứng sau TOBE ( CAN/

COULD/MAY/MIGHT/DO/DOES/HAVE/HAS..,) v trà
-ớc các động từ thờng

* Complete the sentences with an adverb of frequency :

a, Tim play soccer . ( usually )

5’

8’

6’

3’

10’

- Do in 3 groups.

- Ss retell form and use.

- Give note and some
example.

- Retell form and use.

- Do exercise in individually.

- Ss retell one by one.

- Retell all the Vietnamese
meaning.

- Retell

- Do in individually.

- Retell the request of the
teacher quickly.

</div>
(81)<div class='page_container' data-page=81>

b, Nam reads a library book and comics . ( sometimes )
c, I am a good student in class 7A. ( always )

3. Consolidation :

- Ask Ss to retell all the knowledge that they’ve
consolidated in this lesson.

4. Homework :

- Review the vocabulary and grammar structures.
- Do all exercises.

- Prepare for next Writing test.

2’

1’

- Retell the main points.

- Copy down homework.

The second semester

Week 20.(1)

Planning date: 31 / 12 / 2009

Teaching date: 04 / 01 / 2010

Period 55.

Unit 9: At home and away

Lesson 1: a1 (p 86 - 87)

I. The aims and requests:

- Help Ss talk about vacation activities using “was / were, wasn’t / weren’t”.

-By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to understand the text and practice fluently.
- Develop 4 skills: L, S, R & W.

II. Preparation:

1. Teacher’s preparation: lesson plan, posters, word cues
2. Ss’ preparation: textbooks, notebooks.

</div>
(82)<div class='page_container' data-page=82>

Lesson plan: English 7

T: Vu Duc Toan

2. Checking up: No.
3. New lesson :
A. Presentation :

* Pre teach : - T presents some new words :

 aquarium (n) : bÓ , hå c¸ ( example )
souvenir (n) : quà tặng ( explanation )
 be --> (was/were) : thì , là , ở ( revision )
have --> had : cã ( revision )
 take --> took : nhËn ( example )
 go --> went : ®i ( mime )
 buy --> bought : mua ( explanation)

* Check : Matching .

* Ordering : Listen and number the verbs you hear :

- T reads: Liz went to Nha Trang with her parents. They took her to
Tri Nguyen aquarium. Liz bought a lot of gifts. The Robinsons had
a great time in Nha Trang.

* Key : 1,went 2,took 3,bought 4,had
* Presentation dialogue ( A1 ) :

- Ask Ss to read the dialogue and then number the sentences on
p.87.

- Gets feedback : 1d 2b 3a 4c 5e

* Matching: Ask Ss to match what Liz’s thought of Nha Trang.
The people expensive
The food friendly
The things beautiful
The vacation delicious
Nha Trang wonderful
B. Practice : Word cues drill :

- Ask Ss to run through all the cues.
- Ask Ss to practice in pairs.

a, vacation / wonderful; b, Nha Trang / beautiful
c, food / delicious; d, things / expensive
e, people / friendly

Example: S1 : How was the vacation ?
S2: It was wonderful.
C. Production : Guessing game :

- T explains the way to play this game.
- Example: Last vacation I was in ...
S1: Were you in ... ?
S2: Yes, I was / No, I wasn’t.
4. Consolidation :

- Ask Ss to retell the past form.
5. Homework:

- Do ex 1 – workbook – Unit 9.

7’

2’

5’

12’

10’

2’

1’

- Listen and repeat in
chorus, individually.

- Guess the meaning.
- Copy down.

- Matching.

- Listen in
individually then
number the verbs
they hear.

- Work in groups of
4.

- Matching.

- Run through the
cues.

T – class
Side – side
Open pairs
Close pairs

- Asking and
answering to guess .

- Retell some
irregular verbs.
- Copy down
homework.
-Do ex1 at home.

</div>
(83)<div class='page_container' data-page=83>

Planning date: 02 / 01 / 2010

Teaching date: 05 / 01 / 2010

Period 56.

Unit 9: At home and away

Lesson 2: a2 (p 87 - 88)

I. The aims and requests:

- Reading for details about the Robinson’s vacation.

- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to understand the text and answer questions

correctly.

- Develop 4 skills: L, S, R & W.

II. Preparation:

1. Teacher’s preparation: lesson plan, posters.

2. Ss’ preparation: textbooks, notebooks.

</div>
(84)<div class='page_container' data-page=84>

Dan Tien Secondary School .

2010 – 2011.

Lesson plan: English 7

T: Vu Duc Toan

1. Organization

: - Good morning! – Who’s absent

today?

2. Checking up :

- Ask ss to give past form of the verbs :

 be -->

 take -->

 buy -->

 have -->

 visit -->

 go -->

- T corrects and gives them marks.

3. New lesson

:

A. Pre reading :

* Pre teach : - T presents some new words :

 shark (n) : c¸ mËp ( translation )

 dolphin (n) : con c¸ heo ( picture )

 crab (n) : con cua ( realia )

 cap (n) : mò lìi trai ( realia )

 turtle (n) : con rïa biÓn ( translation )

 exit (n) : lèi ra ( explanation )

 fish (n) : c¸ ( explanation )

* Check: What and where.

* Matching : - Ask Ss to match :

eat wore

see thought

wear ate

think saw

* True / False prediction :

- Ask Ss to predict :

1, The Robinson went to Tri Nguyen aquarium.

2, They saw many types of fish.

3, Liz bought a little turtle.

4, They had lunch at a food stall.

5, Liz ate fish and crab.

B. While reading :

- Let Ss read the text carefully.

- Ss read the text again and check their predictions :

* Key: 1T 2T 3F 4T 5F.

* Comprehension questions: Lucky numbers.

- Ask Ss to play the game by asking and answering the

Qs a-->f on p.88.

1 a

2 b

3 LN

4 d

5 c

6 LN

7 e

8 f

- Key :

a, Her parents went to the aquarium with Liz.

b, They saw many types of fish and turtle.

c, They bought a cap and a poster.

d, Yes, she did . Liz wore the cap all day.

e, Yes, they do. Mr. and Mrs. Robinson ate fish and

crab.

f, Because she remembered the beautiful fish in the

aquarium.

C. Post reading : Re- call :

- Let Ss look at the pictures a, b, c, d, e on p.88 to tell

the story of the Robinson’s trip to the Tri Nguyen

Aquarium.

4. Consolidation :

- Retell the contents of the text.

5. Homework

:

- Recall the story about the Robinsons.

- Learn by heart all the new words.

1’

3’

6’

2’

6’

14’

10’

2’

1’

- Ss answer.

- Write the past form

- Listen and repeat in

chorus , individually.

- Guess the meaning.

- Copy down.

- Rewrite words.

- Matching

Work individually.

- Predict T or F in

individual.

-Read the text and

check their

predictions.

- Play the game in 2

teams.

- Retell the story.

- Retell the content

of the text.

</div>
(85)<div class='page_container' data-page=85>

Planning date: 05 / 01 / 2010

Teaching date: 07/ 01 / 2010

Period 57.

Unit 9: At home and away

Lesson 3: a3, 4. (p 89 - 90)

I. The aims and requests:

- Help Ss understand and remember the words and phrases given in the lesson.

- Help Ss listen to a text about the Robinsons’ holiday.

- By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to remember and retell the Robinsons’ holiday.

- Develop 4 skills: L, S , R & W

II. Preparation :

- Teacher’s preparation: lesson plan, tape, cassette, a poster.

- Ss’ preparation: books, notebooks, workbooks.

III. Procedures:

Teacher s activities

’

T

Ss activities

’

1. Organization : Greet and check Ss’ attendance
2. Checking up :

a. Questions :

- Ask Ss to write vocabulary, read the text and answer the questions.
b. Keys :

c. Form of checking : reading and writing
d. Correction, remark , giving mark.

3. New lesson :

* Pre- teach :
I. Vocabulary :

- T elicits some new words.
+ roadside (n) : lề đờng ( trans)
+ peanut (n) : củ lạc (realia)
+ peaceful (adj) : thanh bình (explain)
+ calm (adj) : êm đềm (trans)
+ unfortunately (adv) : không may (trans)
+ (to) rent : thuê (trans)
+ (to) keep in touch : liên lạc (trans)
+ (to) improve : cải tiến, trau dồi (trans)
- Check : R and R

II. Listening ( A 3,4)
A- Pre – listening :

- T says “ You are going to hear a short paragraph about the
Robinsons’ holiday ”

- T asks Ss to guess 5 sentences that they think they have in the
tapecript.

- T gets feedback :

B- While – listening :

- T asks to listen to the tapecript and write the letter of the sentences
they hear.

C- Post – listening :

- T asks Ss to talk about the Robinsons’ holiday in Nha Trang
correctly and fluently.

1’

4’

5’

7’

4’

2’

- Answer

- Individual work

- Listen and repeat in
chorus individually

- Copy down

- Listen and guess 5
sentences

- Write on their
notebooks.

- Retell about the
Robinsons’ holiday in
Nha Trang

</div>
(86)<div class='page_container' data-page=86>

III. Reading ( A4)
A- Pre – reading :

- T sets the scene “You are going to read about Ba’s diary. He wrote
about Liz and her family”

- T hangs an extra board on the bb.
B- While- reading :

- T asks Ss to read all the questions sentences given a-g.

- Then T asks Ss to read Ba’s diary and correct the sentences given.
- T gets feedback : answer

a) Liz lived next door to Ba.
b) Liz learned Vietnamese in VN.
c) Ba collects stamps.

d) Liz’s aunt lives in New York .

e) The Robinsons moved to the other side of Ha Noi.
f) The Robinsons moved. Now Ba is sad.

g) Ba’ll see Liz next week.
C- Post – reading :

- T asks Ss to retell about the main ideas of Ba diary.
- T listens.

- T asks Ss to write 4 sentences about what you did last summer
holiday: place, what you see, what you bought .

4. Consolidation:

- T asks Ss what they have learnt today.
- T asks Ss to retell the Robinsons’ holiday.
5. Homework :

- T asks Ss to learn vocabulary by heart.
- T asks Ss to read the text again.
- T asks Ss to prepare the next lesson.

8’

6’

2’

1’

- Read Ba’s diary
- Check sentences
given

- Copy down

- Work individually

- Listen and retell the
main points of the
lesson.

- Copy down
homework.

- Learn vocabulary
by heart, read the
text.

Week 21(2).

Planning date: 06 / 01 / 2010

Teaching date: 11/ 01 / 2010

Period 58.

Unit 9: At home and away

Lesson 4: B1, 2 (p 91-92)

Neighbors

I.The aims and requests :

- Help ss understand and remember the words and phrases given in the lesson.

- Help ss read for detail and past simple tense with interrogative sentences.

- By the end of the lesson ss will be able to understand how to use the past simple tense

with interrogative sentences .

II. Preparation :

- Teacher’s preparation : lesson plan , cassette , CD , word cues.

- Ss’ preparation : books, notebooks , workbooks.

III. Procedures :

Teacher s activities

’

Tim

e

Ss activities

’

1. Organization : Greeting and checking ss’ attendance.

2. Checking up

:

a) Questions : write vocabulary, do exercise A3 ( i,j )

1’

4’

</div>
(87)<div class='page_container' data-page=87>

b) Keys :

c) Forms of checking : writing

d) Correction, remark , giving mark

3. New lesson :

* Pre- teach :

I. Vocabulary ;

- T elicits some new words :

+ (a) hairdresser : thỵ n tãc, thỵ cắt tóc (explain)

+ material (n) : vải(realia)

+ (a)dressmaker : th may áo đầm (trans)

+ (to) make – made : làm , may(explain)

+ (to) cut – cut : cắt , đốn (mine)

- Check : What and where

II. B 1, 2

–

Neighbors

.

+ Pre

–

questions :

- T points to the picture and sets the scene :” What does

Hoa’s aunt do? / What does Mrs.Mai do ?”

- T asks ss to think of the questions.

+ While- reading :

-T asks to read the dialogue between Lan and Ba.

- T asks ss to discuss the questions given

- T gets feedback:

Answer : 1. She is a hairdresser.

2. She is a dressmaker.

- T asks some questions :

+ Are your neighbors friendly?

+ Do you sometimes help them?

+ Do they help you?

+ What do they do for you?

+ What do they/ you do for them?



Practice : The past simple tense with

interrogative sentence.

- T presents to give a new target item.

Eg : Did your uncle / aunt cut your hair ?

- T asks to repeat .

* Concept check : Meaning .

Form

: A: Did + S + V( inf) ?

B: Yes, S + did / No, S + didn t .

’



Word cues drill :

+ Hoa buy the dress .( x)

+ Her aunt make Hoa’s dress .( v)

+ Her aunt cut Hoa’s hair .( x)

+ You buy that red hat . ( v )

Eg : Did Hoa buy the dress ?- No, she didn’t .

- T gets ss to work in pairs.

- T goes round and corrects ss’ mistakes.

- T asks ss to write 3 sentences about what you did

yesterday.

Eg : Yesterday i stayed at home.

4. Consolidation :

- T asks ss what they have learnt today.

- T guides ss to do exercises .

5. Homework :

7’

6’

18’

6’

2’

1’

- Listen and

repeat in chorus

individually

- Copy down

- Rewrite words.

- Listen

- Predict the

answers.

- Practice in pairs.

- Work in pairs to

answer the qs

given:

+ Yes, they are.

+ Yes, I do.

+ Yes, they do.

+ Yes , she did.

+ No, she didn’t.

-Translate

individually.

- Give form and

use.

</div>
(88)<div class='page_container' data-page=88>

- T asks ss to learn vocabulary by heart.

- Ask ss to do exercises B 2,4 ( p. 56 , 57)

- Prepare for next lesson.

- Listen and copy

down homework.

Date of preparing : 09/ 01 / 2010
Date of teaching : 12 / 01 / 2010.

Period 59.

Unit 9: At home and away

Lesson 4: b3,4

I.The aims and requests :

- Help ss read a text about Hoa and revise the simple past tense with Wh - qs.

- By the end of the lesson ss will be able to understand how to make questions with Wh- qs in the past
simple tense.

II. Preparation :

- Teacher’s preparation : lesson plan , cassette , CD , posters.
- Ss’ preparation : books, notebooks , workbooks.

III. Procedures :

Teacher s activities

’

Tim

e

Ss activities

’

1. Organization : Greeting and checking ss’ attendance.
2. Checking up :

a) Questions : read the dialogue and answer the t’s qs
b) Keys :

c) Forms of checking : reading
d) Correction, remark , giving mark

3. New lesson : * Pre- teach : T elicits some new words 
 hobby (n): së thÝch (translation)

 sewing (n): viƯc may v¸ (explanation)
 Cushion (n): gèi nhùa (translation)
 (a) skirt : c¸i v¸y (realia)
 useful >< useless : h÷u Ých (translation)
 (to) fit – fitted : võa vỈn (example)
 (to) sew : may (explanation)

 (to) decide(-ed): quyết định (translation)
 Check : Matching.

A – B3,4 : Pre readimg (B3 p.93)
a. Pre qs : T sets the scene :

* What do you learn in home economics ?
* Do you want to learn how to make a dress ?
b. True or false statement predictions :

- T gives o poster then asks ss to predict T or F :
1. Hoa thought sewing was a useful hobby.
2. She decided to learn how to sew.

3. She learned how to make a dress.
4. Hoa made a skirt but it was too small.

1’

4’

7’

6’

5’

- Ss answer

- Read and answer
the qs individually.

- Listen and repeat in
chorus individually
- Copy down

- Match words.

- Listen and answer
the t’s qs

</div>
(89)<div class='page_container' data-page=89>

- T gets feedback.
B – While reading :

- T asks ss to read the text and check their predictions.
- T gets feedback : 1-T 2-T 3-f 4-F

c.T gets ss to play a game : Noughts and Crosses

1 a 2 d 3c

4 e 5 g 6 j

7 f 8 b 9 h

* Answer :

1. a sewing machine 2. a skirt 3. blue and white
4. green and white 5. It was too big 6. very well
7. pretty 8. a cushion 9. Her neighbor.
C- Post reading : B4 p.93,94 (Writing)

- T asks ss to read the request then put the verbs in brackets in
the simple past tense.

- T gets feedback : Answer key

* watched * decided ... was
* bought * made ... was
* cut * wasn’t

* used * helped ... fitted
4. Consolidation :

- T asks ss what they have learnt today.
- T guides ss to do exercises .

5. Homework :

- T asks ss to learn vocabulary by heart.
- Ask ss to do exercises B 3 ( p. 57 )
- Prepare for next lesson.

18’

10’

3’

1’

- Read in groups of 4
or 5 ss.

- Check their

predictions.
- Play game in 2
teams to answer the
qs given.

- Read the request
and put the verbs in
the simple past tense
individually.

- Give the note :
* Wh + did + S +
V-inf ?

- S + V (past)

- Retell the simple
past tense.

-Listen and copy
down homework.

Date of preparing : 12/ 01 / 2010
Date of teaching : 16 / 01 / 2010.

Period 60.

Unit 9: At home and away

Laguage focus 3

I.The aims and requests :

- Revise grammar from unit 7 to unit 9 : how to ask and answer about the price.

- By the end of the lesson ss will be able to understand how to make questions with Wh- qs

in the past simple tense, how to use more , less and fewer and say the price fluently.

- Develope 4 skills : listening , speaking , reading and writing.

II. Preparation :

* Teacher’s preparation : lesson plan , cassette , CD , posters.



Ss’ preparation : books, notebooks , workbooks.

III. Procedures :

Teacher s activities

’

T

Ss activities

’

1. Organization : Greet and check ss’ attendance.

</div>
(90)<div class='page_container' data-page=90>

a) Questions : - Ask ss to do ex B1 p.55Ss

b) Keys :Ss answer

c) Forms of checking : speaking / individual

d) Correction, remark , giving mark

3. New lesson :

A- Pre- teach : T elicits some new words

 minimart (n): chỵ nhá (synonym)

 hairdresser (n) : hiƯu c¾t tãc (explanation)

 violet (adj): mµu tÝm (realia)

* Check : Ro and Rm.

B- Language focus 3 :

1. Ask and answer the price :

* form : How much is it / are they ?

It is / They are + price.

T sets the scene by using the picture :



Dialogue built :

Lan

Assistant

How much is the green dress ?---

> It’s 30.000 d

How much is the blue hat ? ----> It’s 15.000d

And what about the violet dress--> It’s 35.000d

What about the yellow hat ? ----> It’s 12.000d

- T asks ss to make similar dialogue using the words

given by T.

- T listens and corrects.

2. The simple past tense

:

- T asks ss to write the past form of the verbs in the table

(p.97)

Eg : buy -- > bought

- T asks ss to answer some qs about the use, form of the

simple past tense :

Note : Ordinary verbs are divided into 2 kinds :



regular verbs (- ed ) / (-d)



irregular verbs

T asks ss to do ex b 4 (p.97-98)

T gets feedback

* Answer key :

b, played / talked / bought / worked / sent

c, help my mom and study English.

3.More / Less and fewer :

- Asks ss to say the use of those then write the sentences

according to the pictures.

Eg : Before : there were 4 bananas

Now : there are fewer bananas.

4. Prepositions :

- T asks ss to retell some prepositions then look at the

map and write the location of each store.

a. Eg : The restaurant is next to the bookstore.

b. Ask and answer about the distance start with How

far ... ?

Eg : How far is it from shoe store to minimart ?

5’

4’

8’

10 ’

6’

- Ss do individually.

- Listen and repeat

in chorus

individually

- Copy down

- Rewrite words.

- Listen and answer

T – Class

Side – Side

Open pairs

Close pairs

- Practice in pairs.

- Do individually.

- Answer

individually.

- Copy down.

- Listen and

answer.

- Write it up

--> next to / near /

opposite /

</div>
(91)<div class='page_container' data-page=91>

It’s 500 meters.

- Then T aks ss to work in pairs, then corrects.

4. Consolidation :

- T asks ss what they have consolidated today.

- T guides ss to do exercises.

5. Homework :

- T asks ss to learn vocabulary by heart.

- Ask ss to complete all the exercies in L.f 3.

- Prepare for next lesson.

2’

1’

the distance...

- More / less and

fewer.

- Copy down

homework.

Week 22(3).

Planning date: 14 / 01 / 2010

Teaching date: 18/ 01 / 2010

Period 61.

Unit 10:

health and hygiene

Lesson 1: a1.personal hygiene

I-The aims and requests:

- Help ss read the detail a letter from Hoa’s mom and revision present simple tense.

- By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to know what Hoa’s mother writes and revise

present simple tense well.

- Develop 4 skills: L, S , R and W.

II. Preparation:

* Teacher’s preparation: lesson plan, posters.

* Ss’ preparation: books, notebooks, workbooks.

III. Procedures:

Teacher s activities’ T Ss activities’
1. Organization : Greet and check Ss’ attendance.

2. Checking up :

a) Questions : - Ask Ss to answer some Qs :
 What is your name?

 Where do you live?

 How far is it from your house to school?
 How do you go to school?

 What subjects do you have today?
b) Keys :Ss answer

c) Forms of checking : speaking
d) Correction, remark , giving mark
3. New lesson :

A- Pre- teach : T elicits some new words

 personal (adj): thuộc về cá nhân (translation)
hygiene (n) : vÖ sinh (translation)

 harvest (n) mùagặt,mùa thu hoạch(explanation)
(to) iron : là (quần áo) (mime)

 probably (adv) : cã lÏ (translation)

 (to) take morning exercise : tËp thÓ dơc bi s¸ng
(explanation)

 (to) be bad for + n : cã h¹i cho... (realia)
 (to) take care: chăm sóc (translation)
* Check: Matching.

B- A1 : Personal hygiene : * Pre reading : Open predictions 
- T sets the scene : What did you know about Hoa ?

1’

5’

7’

5’

- Ss answer

- Answer the T’s qs
individually.

- Listen and repeat in
chorus individually
- Copy down

- Match words.

</div>
(92)<div class='page_container' data-page=92>

Now we are going to read a letter from Hoa’s mother.
- T asks ss to predict what Hoa’s mother writes.
harvest

wash and iron clothes don’t eat too much
* While reading :

1. T asks ss to read the letter from Mom after listen to the tape
1st and then check their predictions.

- T gets feedback.

2. Answer the qs (p.100) :

- Asks ss to read all the qs , then play game : Lucky number
into 2 teams.

* Answer :

a. Because it is almost harvest time.
b. Hoa’s grandfather.

c. After the harvest .

d. she gets up early and does morning exercises everyday.
e. her mother wants her to wash and iron her clothes.

f. She wants Hoa doesn’t eat too much candy and stay up late
- Then asks ss to write the answer in their notebook.

* Post reading :

- T asks ss to retell what Hoa’s mother writes about.
- Gets feedback.

4. Consolidation :

- T asks ss what they have consolidated today.
- T guides ss to do exercises.

5. Homework :

- T asks ss to learn vocabulary by heart.
- Do ex A1(WB and NB).

- Prepare for next lesson.

14’

8’

3’

2’

- Ss to predict what
Hoa’s mother
writes.

- Listen to the tape 1st

and then check their
prediction.

- Play game into 2
teams.

- .Retell in some
groups.

- Retell the content of
the lesson individually.
- Copy down

homework

Planning date: 15/ 01 / 2010

Teaching date: 20/ 01 / 2010

Period 62.

Unit 10:

health and hygiene

Lesson 2: a2, 3.( p 100)

I-The aims and requests:

- Listening a text about Hoa, revise the past simple tense.

- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know what Hoa’s did and they can put the picture in order
well.

- Develop 4 skills: L, S, R and W.
II. Preparation:

* Teacher’s preparation: lesson plan, pictures, cassette, CD.
* Ss’ preparation: books, notebooks, workbooks.

III. Procedures

:

Teacher s activities’ T Ss activities’

Hoa’s mother writes about

1c

7 ln

2 ln

3a

8 b

4d

</div>
(93)<div class='page_container' data-page=93>

1. Organization: Greet and check Ss’ attendance.

2. Checking up : a) Questions : - Ask Ss to read a letter from
Mom and then answer some Qs :

b) Keys :Ss answer

c) Forms of checking : speaking and reading
d) Correction, remark , giving mark

3. New lesson :

A- Pre- teach : T elicits some new words :
 (to) polish(-ed): đánh bóng (picture)
 (to) change(-d): thay đổi (explanation)
 (to) comb(-ed): chải đầu ( mime )
 (a) comb : cái lợc (realia)

 (to) iron(-ed): là quần áo (mime)
 (to) drink – drank ; uống (mime)
 pants (n): quần áo (mặc ở nhà) (picture)
 sandals (n): dép (quai hậu) (realia)
 (to) brush(-ed) (revision)
 (to) eat – ate (revision)
 (to) get – got (revision)
* Check : Ro and Rm.

B – A2 Listening (p.100);

* Pre listening: T sets the scene by using the pictures.

1. Open prediction :

- T asks ss to guess what Hoa is doing.
Eg : a. She is getting her clothes....

- Then asks ss to predict the order of the pictures. then T gets
feedback.

I guess I listen

1. 5. 1- a 5 - g
2. 6. 2 – e 6 - c
3. 7. 3 – f 7 - h
4. 8. 4 – d 8 – b
* While listening :

- T asks Ss to listen to the tape twice or 3 times and check

their predictions. - Gets feedback.

* Post listening:

2. Writing: Ask Ss to write 8 sentences about what Hoa did

using simple past tense.

*

A3 p.101 : Read Nam s diary’

* Pre writing : T asks Ss to give the answer :
Qs: Do you often write diary?

- Then asks Ss to look at the table and read Nam’s diary
1’

4’

8’

10’

- Ss answer

-Read and answer

- Listen and repeat in
chorus individually
- Copy down

- Listen and answer
the qs individually.

-Predict individually.

- Share their ideas.

-Listen and check
their predictions

-Individually work.

- Ss to listen to the
tape twice or 3
times and check
their predictions.

- Listen and repeat

in chorus

</div>
(94)<div class='page_container' data-page=94>

twice , and then fill in the table with time or an action
- T gets feedback.

* While writing:

a. T asks Ss to practice to ask and answer the Qs about what
Nam does everyday.

Eg: T: What does Nam do everyday?

S: He gets up early....

- T asks Ss to work in pair.

- Asks Ss to work in pairs to ask and answer about what your
friend does everyday.

Eg : S1: What do you do everyday ?
S2: What time do you get up?
* Post writing :

- T asks ss to write 3 or 4 sentences about what they do
everyday using the present simple tense.

- T goes round and take notes then correct their mistakes.
4. Consolidation :

- T asks ss what they have consolidated today.
- T guides ss to do exercises.

5. Homework :

- Asks Ss to look at the pictures and write about what Hoa did.
T asks Ss to learn vocabulary by heart.

- Remember the simple past tense

9’

10’

2’

1’

- Play game into 2

teams.

- Answer

- Do individually

and check their

predictions.

- Pairs work.

--> He gets up..

-Individually

work.

- Retell the content of
the lesson.

- Listen and copy

-Cop down

homework.

Planning date: 17 / 01 / 2010

Teaching date: 21/ 01 / 2010

Period 63.

Unit 10:

health and hygiene

Lesson 3: a4.personal hygiene

I-The aims and requests:

- Reading Nam’s diary and complete Hoa’s reply to her mother with suitable verbs.

- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to ask and answer about what you do everyday and complete Hoa’s
reply to her mother with suitable verbs well.

- Develop 4 skills: L, S , R and W.
II. Preparation:

* Teacher’s preparation: lesson plan, poster.
* Ss’ preparation: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Procedures:

Teacher s activities’ T Ss activities’
1. Organization: Greet and check Ss’ attendance.

2. Checking up: a) Questions: - Ask Ss to retell what Hoa did.
Write vocabulary

b) Keys :Ss answer

c) Forms of checking : speaking and writing
d) Correction, remark , giving mark

3. New lesson :

1’
4’

- Ss answer

</div>
(95)<div class='page_container' data-page=95>

A- Pre- teach : T elicits some new words :
strange (adj): l¹ (explanation)
(to) worry – worried : lo lắng (explanation)
carefully (adj) : 1 cách cẩn thận (translation)
must (m.v) : ph¶i (explanation)
(to) wash face (revision)
(to) brush teeth (revision)
(to) comb hair (revision)
(to) do morning exercises (revision)
(to) take a shower (revision)
* Check: What and Where.

B – A 4 :

2. A4 : Complete Hoa s reply to her mother’ with suitable verbs
:

- Ask ss to retell what Hoa’s mother write to Hoa , then t
presents Hoa’s letter to her mother.

- T asks ss to read Hoa’s letter and complete the it with suitable
verbs.

- T gets feedback.

* Answer : 1.was 2. having 3. show 4. Take 5. get
6.go 7.wash 8.iron 9.eating 10.told 11.see 12.go

- T asks Ss to answer some Qs to check their understanding
about Hoa’s letter:

 To whom does Hoa write a letter
 How is she doing at school?
 What does she do everyday?
 What does she never do?
 What time does she go to bed?

 What do you do to take care of yourself?
 4. Consolidation :

- T asks Ss what they have consolidated today, which tense is
used ?

- T guides Ss to do exercises.
5. Homework :

- T asks Ss to learn vocabulary by heart.
- Complete a diary

- Prepare for next lesson.

7’

4’

14’

2’

1’

- Listen and repeat in
chorus individually
- Copy down
- Pairs work.
--> He gets up...

- Individually work
- Pair work.

- Work in group.
- Listen and answer
- Read Hoa’s letter and
then fill in the gaps
with suitable verbs.
- Listen and answer
--> her mother -->fine
--> gets up --> goes to
bed late --> 9.30

--> gets up early
- Retell the content of
the lesson.

- Listen and copy.

Week 23(4).

Planning date: 21 / 01 / 2010

Teaching date: 25/ 01 / 2010

Period 64.

Unit 10:

health and hygiene

Lesson 4:b1, 4. (p.103 - 105)

</div>
(96)<div class='page_container' data-page=96>

I.The aims :

-- After the lesson Ss will be able to practice asking and answering the questions about the tooth with the
words: fill cavity, fix one’s tooth, scared, hurt...

-To drill Ss reading skills.
- Develop 4 skills: L, S , R and W.

Ss will be able to tell about a visit to the dentist . They will be used to asking and answering about this

topic .

II. Language content :
 1.Vocabulary :
 2.Grammar :

- The simple present and past tense
What’s the matter ? = What’s wrong ?

-word cues, Ask and answer the questions
III.Technique :

Explanation , eliciting , pairwork , groupwork .
IV

*Preparation:

* Teacher’s preparation: lesson plan, poster.

</div>
(97)<div class='page_container' data-page=97>

Dan Tien Secondary School .

2010 – 2011.

Lesson plan: English 7

T: Vu Duc Toan

- Greetings .

- Have Ss play a game : Hangman
Matter , Worry , tooth , Feel
- Remark .

2.New activities :

- Ask Ss some questions such as :

+ What will you do if you have a tooth ache?
+ When you go to the dentist , what will the dentist
do ?

- Ask Ss to look at the picture and answer the
question : What’s the matter with Minh , the boy
in the picture ?

- Introduce the situation of the lesson , then
explain some new words to Ss .

 Vocabulary:
+ Dentist ( n ) : nha sĩ

+ An appointment ( n ) :cc hĐn, sù hĐn gỈp
+ Scared ( adj ) :sợ hÃI (ai, cái gì)

+ Cavity ( n ) : lỗ hổng, lỗ thủng ( sâu răng)
+ To fill ( v ) : làm đầy ,trám hàm răng
+ To hate ( v ) = to dislike ( v )

+ To hurt ( v ) : đau, bị ®au
+ Drill ( n ) : c¸i khoan
*Checking: Slap the board

- Have Ss read new words in chorus and
individually .

- Ask Ss to listen to the tape and answer the
questions :

+ What is Minh going to do at 10:30 ?
+What happened to Hoa last week ?
+ How did the doctor help Hoa ?
- Play the tape for Ss .

- Play the tape again and ask Ss to read after the
tape .

- Ask Ss to answer the questions above .
- Correct and give the correct answers .
- Have Ss work in pairs reading the dialogue .
- Call on some pairs to read the dialogue in front

of the class .

- Correct their pronunciation .

- Ask Ss to read the dialogue again and find out
the answers for the questions .

- Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering the
questions .

* Play agame: Lucky number

1.Why did Hoa go to the dentist last week ?

2What is wrong with Minh ?

3.LN

4.Does Minh like going to the dentist ?
How do you know ?

5.Are you scared of seeing the dentist ?
6.LN

7.What did the dentist do with Hoa’s toothache ?

8.What did you do the last time you had a bad toothache ?
9.LN

10.How does Minh feel after talking with Hoa ?

-3.Consolidation :

4’

7’

12’

8’

6’

Play a game .

Answer the questions .

Look at the picture then
answer the questions .
Listen and write down .
Guess the meaning , read
new words in chorus and
individually , then copy
down .

Play a game : Slap the
board .

Two groups take part in
the game .

Listen to the tape , then
find the answers .

Listen to the tape .
Read after the tape .
- Answer the questions .
Listen .

Work in pairs .

Practice in front of the
class .

Have Ss play a game :
Lucky numbers

Read the dialogue again
and find out the answers .
Work in pairs .

Play a game in groups .

Answer the questions
Write the answers in the
notebooks .

97 Find someone who Name

.has a toothache ?

…

.likes going to the dentist ?

…

</div>
(98)<div class='page_container' data-page=98>

Planning date: 22 / 01 / 2010

Teaching date: 26/ 01 / 2010

Period 65.

Unit 10:

health and hygiene

Lesson 4:b2,3. (p.104)

I/ The aims :

By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know about Dr Lai’s job . They continue to

practice about the topic of toothache. Listening and reading for details about Dr. Lai’s job to

revise the present simple tense.

Practice listening and reading skills.

II. Language content:

1. Vocabulary:

- To explain - To remind - Sensibly - Surgery

- To smile - To check - To notice

2. Grammar:

Review: the simple present tense

III/Technique:

Eliciting, pair work, group work.

IV/Teaching aids:

T: Textbook, tape, cassette, sub- board.

S: EL books, Exercises books, notebook.

V. Procedure:

Teacher s activities’ T Ss activities’
1. Warm up :

- Greetings.

- Have Ss play a game : Slap the board

2.New activities :
a) Listen and answer

- Introduce the situation of the listening.
- Ask Ss to read the questions in the book then

guess the answers for the questions.
- Call on some groups to give their answers.
Play the tape for Ss checking their predictions.

- Explain some new words to Ss.
 Vocabulary:

+ explain ( v ) :gi¶I thÝch ( Trans)
+ remind ( v ) :Nh¾c nhë( Trans)

+ Sensibly ( adj ) : Biết điều, hợp lí , điều độ.
+ Surgery ( n ) :sự giải phẫu, phẫu thuật.
+ smile ( v ) : Mỉm cời ( revision)

+ notice ( v ) :Chó ý, lu ý, ghi chó.( Trans)

+ Serious ( adj ) : nghiêm trọng , trầm trọng (trans)
Check: R&R

Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually.
- Play the tape again for Ss.

- Ask Ss to give the answers.

- Play the tape again for Ss checking the answers.

1’

5’

7’

5’

14’

-Greetings.
Play a game.

-Two groups take part in
the game.

-Listen to the teacher.
-Read the questions in the

book and guess the
answers ( work in groups)
-Give the predictions.
-Listen and check the
predictions.

-Listen and write down.

-Read new words in
chorus and individually,
guess meaning then copy
down.

Listen to the tape to check
the predictions.

Give the answers.
Check the answers
Write the answers in the
notebooks.

Appointmen

t

Cavity

Hurt

Toothach

e

</div>
(99)<div class='page_container' data-page=99>

- Correct and give the correct answers.
a. Dr Lai is a dentist.

b. She wears uniform to work.

c. Most children feel scared when they come to see Dr Lai.
d. She explains what will happen. She gives them advice.

- Ask Ss to write down.
b) Listen and read.

Ask Ss to look at the picture and answer the questions :
+ What is the matter with Minh?

+ How does he feel?

+ What is the doctor doing?
+ Why does that happen to Minh?

- Call on some Ss to give their answers.

Ask Ss to look at the book and listen to the tape (two times)
- Have Ss read the text in silent.

-Call on some Ss to read the text in front of the class.
-Ask Ss to complete the story with suitable words.
-Have Ss exchange the results with their partners.
Call on some Ss to give the answers in front of the class.
*Correct the mistakes then give the answer key :

Minh is very nervous and Dr Lai notices this. She smiles to
Minh and tells him not to worry. She explains one of his
teeth has a cavity. He has to brush them regularly. After Dr
Lai fills his tooth, Minh leaves. He is very pleased

Call on some Ss to read the completed the story aloud.
2. Consolidation :

Repeat the content of the lesson.
3. Homework :

- Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for
each.

- Do exercises 2, 3 at page 65 in workbook
- Prepare part 4, 5.

8’

3’

2’

-Look at the picture and
answer the questions.
Give the answers.
Look at the book and
listen to the tape.
Read the text in silent
Read the text aloud.

-Complete the story with
the suitable words.

-Exchange the result with
the partner.

-Give the answers in front
of the class.

- Listen and write
down.

-Read the story aloud.

Listen to the teacher.
-Write homework.

- Retell the content of the
lesson individually.
- Copy down homework

Planning date: 24 / 01 / 2010

Teaching date: 28/ 01 / 2010

Period 66.

Unit 10:

health and hygiene

Revision

I/ The aims :

By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to consolidation all structure grammar .The students

do exercises in order to practice the structures which have been learnt , they will use them

and apply to do exercises well .

-Develop 4 skills: L,S,R,& W.

II. Language content :* Review

The simple past tense . / Preposition of position / How far

…

? /

How much

…

? / Compound adjectives / Directions

More,less,fewer. / Why-because

…

/ Imperatives .

III/Technique:

Eliciting, pair work, group work.

IV/Teaching aids:

</div>
(100)<div class='page_container' data-page=100>

V. Procedure:

Teacher s activities

’

T

Ss activities

’

1. HOW MUCH IS IT ?

*Form : How much is it / are they ?

It is / They are + price.

How much +be + S ?

(How much + do/ does + S + cost?)

à It s/ They re +( price )

’

*Use: Ask and answer about the prices.

2

*

The simple past tense :

*Form:

To be( was/were)…

S + V_ed …

V_qkbqt …

*Use: Diễn tả h nh

à

động xảy ra v k

à ết thóc tại 1

thời điểm , khoảng thời gian x¸c định trong qu¸

khứ.

- T asks ss to write the past form of the verbs in the

table (p.97)

Eg : buy -- > bought

Note : Ordinary verbs are divided into 2 kinds :



regular verbs (- ed ) / (-d)



irregular verbs

T asks ss to do ex b 4 (p.97-98)

T gets feedback

* Answer key :

b, played / talked / bought / worked / sent

c, help my mom and study English.

3.More / Less and fewer :

* More + countable noun ( nhiều hơn)

* Fewer + countable noun ( it hơn)

* Less + uncountable noun (it hơn)

Asks ss to say the use of those then write the

sentences according to the pictures.

Eg : Before : there were 4 bananas

Now : there are fewer bananas.

4. Prepositions :

* Matching:

1.

near

a. bên trái

2.

opposite

b. ở gần

3.

between

c. bên phải

4.

beside/ next to

d. đối diện

5.

to the right e. ở giữa

6.

to the left

f. bên cạnh

T asks ss to retell some prepositions then look at the

map and write the location of each store.

a. Eg : The restaurant is next to the bookstore.

5.Why-because

…

Why + do/does + S + V

…

?

Because + S + V…

* Consolidation

:

1’

5’

7’

5’

14’

8’

3’

2’

-Greetings.
Play a game.

-Two groups take part in
the game.

-Listen to the teacher.
-Read the questions in the
book and guess the
answers ( work in groups)
-Give the predictions.
-Listen and check the
predictions.

-Listen and write down.

-Read new words in
chorus and individually,
guess meaning then copy
down.

- Ss to answer some qs

about the use, form of

the simple past tense :

Give the answers.

Check the answers
Write the answers in the
notebooks.

-Look at the picture and
answer the questions.
Give the answers.
Look at the book and
listen to the tape.
Read the text in silent
Read the text aloud.

-Complete the story with
the suitable words.

Exchange the result with
the partner.

-Give the answers in front
of the class.

</div>
(101)<div class='page_container' data-page=101>

- Retell the main points of this lesson.

* Homework:

- Do all exercises.

- Learn by heart vocabulary and some structure

grammar.

- Prepare for next lesson.

-Write homework.

- Retell the content of the
lesson individually.
- Copy down homework

Week 24(5).

Planning date: 27 / 01 / 2010

Teaching date: 01/ 02/ 2010

Period 67.

Unit 11:

Keep fit, stay healthy

Lesson 1: a1.a check - up

I.The aims :

By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to understand the content of the dialogue and give the
requests and the responses.

II. Language content:
1. Vocabulary:

- Medical check – up/ - To measure / Medical record / - To weigh

- Height / - Weight / Temperature / - To take one’s temperature

- Scales / - Normal

2. Grammar:

- The structure: Would you + V?
 - Review The simple present tense.
III.Technique :

Explanation, using pictures , pair work , group work .
IV. Teaching aids :

Textbook , tape , cassette , pictures .

V.Procedure :

Teacher s activities

’

T

Ss activities

’

1. Warm up :
- Greetings .

- Ask Ss some questions such as :
+ Do you eat much candy ?

+ Do you often eat ice- creams?
+ How often do you brush your teeth ?

+ If you have healthy teeth , what should you do ?
- Remark and lead in new lesson .

2. New activities:

-Ask Ss to look at the picture and guess : Where are they ?
What are they doing ?

-Introduce the situation of the lesson , then explain some new
words to Ss .

 Vocabulary:

+ Medical check- up ( n ) : Kh¸m søc kháe (trans)
+ Medical record ( n ) : PhiÕu kh¸m sk (trans )
+ Height ( n ) :ChiÒu cao (trans)

+ To measure ( v ) :Đo ( trans)
+ To weigh ( v ) :Cân nặng ( trans)
+ Temperature ( n ) :nhiệt độ, Sốt. (trans)

+ To take one’s temperature : Đo nhiệt độ của ai…
+ Scales ( n ) : Cái cân ( explain )

+ Normal ( adj ) : B×nh thêng (trans)

* Structure:Would you open your mouth , please ?

Would you + V ?

1’

5’

7’

- Ss answer

- Greetings .
- Answer the

questions .
-Look at the picture and
answer the questions .

- Listen to the
teacher .

-Read new words in chorus
and individually , guess the
meanings , then copy
down .

-Play a game : rub out and
remember .

-Guess the order of the
sentences .

</div>
(102)<div class='page_container' data-page=102>

- Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually.
 Checking: Rub out and remember .

Have Ss guess the content of the dialogue and order the
sentences .

-Call on some Ss to give their predictions in front of the class .
-Ask Ss to look at the books and listen to the tape then check
their order .

-Ask them to read the dialogue again and give the answers .
- Correct and give the correct answers :

1.F 2.D 3. C 4. G 5. E 6. A 7. H 8. B

- Ask Ss to write the correct answer in the notebooks.
- - Have Ss work in pairs reading the dialogue .
-Call on some pairs to practice reading in front of the class.

- Correct their pronunciation.
 Comprehension questions :

-Have Ss play a game : Lucky numbers

1. What were the students of QT school doing ?
2. LN

3. Who was doing the medical check – up ?
4. What did the nurse do ?

5. LN

6. What was Hoa’s temperature? Was it normal?
7. What was her height ?

8. What was her weight ? How heavy was she ?

*Consolidation :

- Ask Ss to use the structure: Would you + V ?

to make the sentences by playing a game : Noughts and crosses
Take

temperature Open your mouth Fill in the form
Sit down Get on the scales Measure your

height 
Speak Ah Wait in the

waiting room Give name
Make example :

Would you open your mouth , please ?
- Remark .

*.Homework:

- Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each.
- Do exercise 1,2 at page 66 in workbook .

- Prepare part 2, 3.

5’

14’

8’

3’

2’

Write the correct answers .
Work in pairs .

Practice in front of the class
.

- Play a game :
Answer the questions
2 groups take part in the
game .

Play a game :Noughts and
crosses

Make sentences with the
cues .

- Write homework .

- Retell the content of the
lesson individually.
- Copy down homework

Planning date: 29 / 01 / 2010

Teaching date: 02/ 02/ 2010

Period 68.

Unit 11:

Keep fit, stay healthy

Lesson 1: a2, 3.a check - up

I.The aims :

- By the end of the lesson, Ss will listen for details to complete the dialogue and practice asking and
answering about the personal information.

- Develop 4 skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing.
II. Language content:

1. Vocabulary :

Review the vocabulary about health.
Male - Female

2. Grammar :

The simple present tense.

</div>
(103)<div class='page_container' data-page=103>

What + to be + N ?

III.Technique: Eliciting, pairwork, groupwork.
IV.Teaching aids:

Textbook, tape, cassette.

V.Procedure:

Teacher s activities’ T Ss activities’
1. Warm up :

- Greetings.

- Have Ss play a game : Slap the board

- Demonstrate the group which wins the game.
2.New activities :

A. Listen. Then write the missing words.
- Introduce the situation of the lesson.

-Ask Ss to read the dialogue and guess the missing words.
- Have Ss listen to the tape for the first time.

- Ask Ss to listen to the tape again and find out the words
to fill in the blanks.

- Ask Ss to exchange the results with the partners.
Call on some Ss to give the answers in front of the class.
-Have Ss listen to the tape again and check their answers.

- Correct and give the correct answers.

Doctor: I want to ask you a few questions before I start, Hoa.

How old are you?

Hoa: Fourteen.

Doctor: And your height is one meter 50 centimeters?
Hoa: No. I think I’m shorter. The nurse measured me.
Doctor: Oh. How tall are you?

Hoa: One meter 45 centimeters.

Doctor: I will ask the nurse to check your height again. How
heavy are you?

Hoa: I think I’m 42 kilograms.

Doctor: No. It says on your form that you’re 40 kilograms.
- Ask Ss to practice the dialogue with the partner.
-Call on some pairs to practice the dialogue in front of the class.

- Correct their pronunciation.

B. Ask and answer questions with a partner.

- Introduce the situation of the exercise to Ss and explain
some questions :

+ Which school does he go to?
+ What is his surname?

+ How tall is he = What’s his height?

+ What’s his weight? = How heavy is he?

-Ask Ss to work in pairs: One is A , the other is B asking and
asnwering the information to complete the medical record .

- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class .
- Correct the mistakes if necessary.

- Ask Ss to complete the form in their notebooks .
3.Consolidation :

- Have Ss play a game: Survey.

1’

5’

7’

5’

14’

8’

3’

- Greetings.
Play a game: Slap the
board.

-Play agame in two teams
(2 groups take part in the
game.

- Clap the hands.

Listen to the teacher
carefully.

-Read the dialogue and
guess the missing words.
-Listen to the tape carefully.
-Exchange the result with
the partner.

-Give the answers in front
of the class.

-Listen to the tape again
and check the answers.
-Listen and copy down.

Work in pairs reading the
dialogue.

-Practice the dialogue in
front of the class.

-Listen to the teacher and

write down.

-Work in pairs.

-Some pairs pratice in front
of the class.

-Complete the form in the
notebooks.

- Play a game.
-Work in groups.

Height

Scale

s

Medical check

up

Medical record

Norm

</div>
(104)<div class='page_container' data-page=104>

- Ask Ss to work in groups: Ask their friends in order to
have information and write in the form.

Name Male/
Female

Age Weight Height

Hoa §V

Call on some groups to practice in front of the class .
4.Homework :

-Learn by heart vocabulary and some structure grammar
Do exercise 3,4 at page 67 in workbook .

Prepare part B1 .

2’

Practice in front of the
class.

- Write homework.

Planning date: 02/ 02 / 2010

Teaching date:0 4/ 02/ 2010

Period 69.

Unit 11:

Keep fit, stay healthy

Lesson 3: b1.

What was wrong with you?

I.The aims:

By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to ask and asnwer questios about sickness and

further practice in the past simple, question forms and negative forms.

II. Language content:

1. Vocabulary:

- Bad cold - Sick note

- Headache - Virus

- Stomachache - Flu

2. Grammar:

The simple past tense: question forms and negative forms.

Structures: What is/ was wrong with SB?

I have/ had a headache.

She has / had a bad cold.

III.Technique:

Explanation, eliciting, pairwork, groupwork.

IV.Teaching aids:

Textbook, tape, cassette, pictures.

V. Procedure:

Teacher s activities

’

T

Ss activities

’

1. Warm up :
- Greetings.

- Ask Ss some questions about themselves.
EX: How tall are you?

What’s your weight?
How old are you?
………..

- Remark and give marks.
2.Presentation :

1’

5’

- Greetings .
- Answer T’s

questions .
-Listen to the teacher and
copy down .

</div>
(105)<div class='page_container' data-page=105>

- Introduce the situation of the lesson the explain some
new words and structures :

+ To have a bad cold :

a headache / a virus / flu / a stomachache .
+ To be sick = to be ill .

+ Sick note ( n ) :
Have Ss play a game

Structures : What is / was wrong with SB ?
EX: What was wrong with you ?

I had a headache.
3.Practice :

- Ask Ss to look at the pictures and answer the questions:
+ Look at balloon 1 :

Lan wasnot there . She was absent . What do you think 
Mr. Tan is asking Lan? What was wrong with her? 
( look at balloon 2 )

- Ask Ss to read the dialogue and answer the questions .
-Call on some Ss to answer the questions in front of the class .

- Have Ss listen to the tape and look at the books then
check the answers.

- Have Ss read the dialogue in pairs .

-Call on some pairs to practice the dialogue in front of the class.

- Correct their pronunciation.

- Ask Ss to work in pairs asking and answering the
questions in the books .

- Call on some pairs to ask and answer the questions in
front of the class .

- Correct the mistake and give the correct answers :
a) Lan didn’t go to school yesterday because she had a bad

cold.

b) She had a headache .

c) Mr. Tan tells Lan to stay inside at recess .
d) The doctor said that Lan had a virus .
e) The doctor wrote Lan’s sick note .

- Ask Ss to copy down .
4.Production :

- Give some cues and ask Ss to practice in pairs .
You / a cold . She / toothache .

Lan / headache . He / flu .
Ba / Stomachache .

Make example :

S1 : What was wrong with you ?
S2: I had a cold .

- Have Ss work in pairs .

- Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of the
class .

- Remark .
*Homework :

- Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each .
- Do exercise 1,2 at page 71 in workbook .

- Prepare part 2,3 .

7’

5’

14’

8’

3’

2’

Make sentences :

What was wrong with
her ?

She had a bad cold .

Look at the pictures and
answer the questions.
Read the dialogue in silent
to find out the answers.
-Give the answers in front
of the class.

-Listen to the tape and
check the answers .

-Work in pairs reading the
dialogue .

-Practice reading the
dialogue in front of the
class .

- Work in pairs .
-Practice asking and
answering in front of the
class.

- Copy down .
Work in pairs .

Listen .

- Work in pairs .
Practice in front of the
class.

Write homework.

- Retell the content of the
lesson individually.
- Copy down homework

Week 25(6).

Planning date: 03/ 02 / 2010

Teaching date: 08/ 02/ 2010

</div>
(106)<div class='page_container' data-page=106>

Unit 11:

Keep fit, stay healthy

Lesson 4: b2, 3

I/The aims:

The students continue to review vocabulary about the common illness, they listen to the tape for specific
information. Practice listening and speaking skills.

II. Language content:

Review vocabulary about the common illness.
The past simple tense.

III.Technique:

Eliciting, Pairwork, groupwork.
IV.Teaching aids:

Textbook, tape, cassette, sub- board.
V.Procedure:

Teacher s activities’ T Ss activities’
1. Warm up :

- Greetings.

- Have Ss play a game : Networks

Demonstrate the group which wins the game.
2.New activities :

A. Take a survey

- Introduce the aim of the exercise.

- Ask Ss to work in groups of four and ask them to
choose a secretary for their group.

- Have Ss use the table B2 to take a survey
EX: Were you absent from school last semester?
Did you have a cold?

a stomachache ?
the flu ?

a toothache ?

-Ask the secretaries to give the results of their groups.
- Combine the result for the whole class.
- Ask Ss to answer the questions :

What was the most common illness?
What was the least common illness?
- Remark.

B. Listen.

- Introduce the aim of the listening to Ss.
- Ask Ss to draw the table in the notebooks.

- Have Ss predict the days lost through sickness in
class 7A last semester.

- Call on some Ss to give their predictions
- Have Ss listen to the tape and check their

prediction.

- Play the tape again for Ss to complete the table.
- Ask Ss to exchange the result with the partner.

1’

5’

7’

5’

14’

8’

- Greetings.
Play a game : Networks

2 groups take part in the
game.

Listen to the teacher.
-Work in groups.

- Take a surve.
Give the results of the
groups.

Answer the questions.
Copy the answer in the
notebooks.

Listen to the teacher.
Draw the table.

-Predict the days lost
through sickness.
-Give the prediction.
-Listen to the tape and
check the prediction.
-Listen and complete the
table.

-Exchange the result with
the partner.

-Give the answer in front
of the class.

-Listen to the tape and

</div>
(107)<div class='page_container' data-page=107>

- Call on some Ss to give their answers in front of the
class.

-Play the tape again for Ss to check their answers.
- Correct and give the correct answers :
+ Cold : 10 + Flu : 43

+ Stomachache : 37 + Headache : 5
+ Toothache : 17

+ Total days lost : 112
3.Consolidation:

-Ask Ss to compare the days lost through sickness in class 7A

with those in their own class

-Ask some Ss to report in front of the class.

EX: Last semester in class 7A, cold caused 10 days’ absence
but in my class cold caused 7 days’absence…….

- Remark.
4.Homework :

- Write the comparation in the notebooks.
- Do exercise 3 at page 71 in workbook.
- Prepare part 4.

- Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for
each.

- Prepare part 2,3 .

3’

2’

check the answers.
Copy down.

-Compare the days lost
through sickness in class
7A with the own class.
-Some Ss report in front

of the class.

-Write homework.

- Retell the content of the
lesson individually.
- Copy down homework

Planning date: 03/ 02 / 2010

Teaching date: 08/ 02/ 2010

Period 71.

Unit 11:

Keep fit, stay healthy

Lesson 5: b4.

I.The aims:

By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to understand the symptoms of the common cold and the
cues to prevent it. Practice readind skill.

II. Language content:
 1. Vocabulary:

- Disease - Symptom
- Runny nose - Slight fever
- To cough - To sneeze
- To prevent - To relieve
- Cure => to cure - To disappear

2. Grammar:

The simple present tense
III. Technique:

Explanation, eliciting, pairwork, groupwork.
IV.Teaching aids:

Textbook, tape, cassette, picture.

V.Procedure:

Teacher s activities’ T Ss activities’
1. Warm up :

- Greetings.

- Have Ss play a game : Guessing game

1’ - Greetings.
-Play a game: guessing
game.

</div>
(108)<div class='page_container' data-page=108>

- Ask Ss to write a disease which they caught last
time in a paper sheet.

- Have one student go to the board and others guess.
- Remark, ask Ss some questions about the disease

they caught and lead in the new lesson.

2.Pre- reading :

- Introduce the situation of the lesson, then explain
some new words to Ss.

+ Disease ( n ) : BÖnh (Trans)
+ Symptom ( n ) : TriÖu chøng (trans)
+ Runny nose ( n ) : Sỉ mịi (explain)
+ Slight fever ( n ) : Sèt nhÑ (Explain)
+ To cough ( v ) : Ho (mime)
+ To sneeze ( v ) : Hắt hơi (mime)
+ To relieve ( v ) : Làm giảm( trans)
+ To prevent ( v ) : Ngăn ngừa(trans)
+ To disappear ( v ) : BiÕn mÊt(trans)
+ Cure ( n ) = > to cure : Chữa trị(trans)
- Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually.

- Have Ss play a game: rub out and remember in
order to check new words.

- Have Ss work in groups discussing the questions :
+ Why do people call the cold “common’’?

+ What are the symptoms of the common cold?

- Call some Ss from groups to give their discussion in
front of the class.

3.While – reading :

-Ask Ss to look at the books and listen to the tape then check
their discussion.

- Have Ss read the text in silent.

- Call on some Ss to answer the pre- questions.
- Have some Ss read the text aloud.

- Correct their pronunciation.

- Have Ss read the text again and find out the
answers for the questions in the book.

-Ask Ss to work in pairs asking and asnwering the questions.
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class.
- Correct the mistake and give the correct answers :
a) Because every year millions of people catch it.
b) They are: a runny nose, a slight fever, coughing and

sneezing.

c) No, there is no cure for the common cold.
d) No, these medicines don’t cure a cold, but they

relieve the symptoms.

e) We can prevent a cold by eating well, doing
exercise, keeping fit and staying healthy.
4.Post – reading :

- Ask Ss to write about the common cold.

-Call on some Ss to read their writings in front of the class .
- Remark.

5.Homework :

-Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each.
- Do exercise 4 at page 73 in workbook.
- Prepare unit 12- A1

5’

7’

5’

14’

8’

3’

2’

game.

-Listen to the teacher
carefully.

Read new words in chorus
and individually, then
guess the meanings and
copy down.

- Play a game.
-Work in groups.

-Give the answers in front
of the class.

- Look at the books and
listen to the tape.

-Read the text in silent.
-Answer the questions.
-Read the text aloud.
-Read the text again and
find out the answers.

- Work in pairs.
-Practice in front of the
class.

- Copy down.
-Write about the common
cold.

-Read the writing aloud.

- Write homework.
Write homework.

</div>
(109)<div class='page_container' data-page=109>

Week 26(7)

Planning date: 08/ 02 / 2010

Teaching date: 22/ 02/ 2010

Period 72.

WRITTEN TEST 3 ( 45’)

ENGLISH 7

A/ The aim and request:

To check Ss’ progress and Ss’ understanding.

To evaluate Ss’ level.

To help Ss focus on learning tasks.

B/ Preparation:

6. Teacher’s questions

7. Ss’ consolidation

C/ Proceduce:

</div>
(110)<div class='page_container' data-page=110>

Week 26(7)

Planning date: 18/ 02 / 2010

Teaching date: 23/ 02/ 2010

Period 73.

Unit 12: Let’s eat !

Lesson 1: A1. What shall we eat?

I.The aims:

By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to understand the details and practice food vocabulary.
II. Language content:

1. Vocabulary:

- Spinach - Durian 
- Cucumber - Papaya
- Pineapple - Ripe
-To smell

2 2.Grammar :

- The simple present tense.

* The structure:

* I d like’ …….

* So do I / I do , too

* Neither do I / I don t , either .’

III.Technique:

Explanation, using pictures, pairwork, groupwork.
IV.Teaching aids:

Textbook, tape, cassette, pictures.

V.Procedure:

Teacher s activities’ T Ss activities’
1. Warm up :

- Greetings.

-Have Ss play a game: Kim’s game.

( Use the pictures or words written on the board of : fish ,
chicken , beef , milk , bananas, apples , carrots , oranges )
-Call the students to go to the board and write again.
Remark and lead in the new lesson.

2. New activities :

- Ask Ss some questions such as :
+ Do you usually go to the market?

+ Who do you often go to the market with?
+ What do you often see / buy at the market?

..
………

-Introduce the situation of the lesson to Ss and ask Ss to
guess what Hoa and her aunt bought at the market.
-Have Ss look at the pictures and listen to the tape.
-Ask Ss to look at the book and read after the tape.
-Explain some new words and structures to Ss.

+ Spinach ( n ) : Rau chân vịt (trans)
+ Cucumber ( n ) : Da chuột (Realia- Pic)
+ Papaya ( n ) : Đu đủ (pic-Realia)
+ Pineapple ( n ) : Quả dứa (Pic- realia)
+ Durian ( n ) : Quả sầu riêng (pic)
+ Ripe ( adj ) : chín ( trans)

+ To smell ( v ) : ngöi thÊy / cã mïi ( trans)

*Structures :

+ I like spinach and cucumbers.

 So do I / I do, too.

+ I don t like pork.’

 Neither do I. / I don t, either.’

1’

5’

7’

5’

14’

- Greetings.
Play a game.

-Go to the board and write.

Answer T’s questions.
Listen to the teacher and
guess what they bought.
Look at the pictures and
listen to the tape.

-Read after the tape.
Listen and write.

-Read new words in
chorus and individually,
guess meanings and copy
down.

</div>
(111)<div class='page_container' data-page=111>

 Have Ss played a game: What and where.
- Ask Ss to read the dialogues in pairs.

-Call on some pairs to practice reading in front of the class.
- Correct their pronunciation.

- Ask Ss to read the dialogues again to find out the
answer in the book.

Have Ss play a game :
*Lucky numbers

1) What did Hoa and her aunt buy at the market?
2) LN.

3) Does Hoa like pork? How about her aunt?
4) LN.

5) What meat would they like for dinner?

6) What are the favorite vegetables of Hoa’s aunt?
7) LN

8) What fruit did they buy?
9) Why didn’t they buy a papaya?
10) LN

* Demonstrate the group which wins the game.
-Ask Ss to write the answer in the notebook
3. Consolidation

-Have Ss talk about the food they like and dislike.

-Ask Ss to work in group of four making real conversations
about shopping.

-Call on some groups to practice in front of the class.
- Remark and give marks.

4. Homework :

-Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each.
-Do exercise 1 at page 74 in workbook.

-Prepare part 2.

8’

3’

2’

Play a game.

- Work in pairs.
Practice reading in front of
the class.

-Read the dialogues again
to find the answer.

-Play a game in 2 groups.
Take the numbers and

answer the questions.

Clap the hands.

-Write the answers in the
notebook.

Talk about the food.
-Work in groups making
conversations.

-Practice in front of the
class.

-Write homework.

- Retell the content of the
lesson individually.
- Copy down homework.

Planning date: 22/ 02 / 2010

Teaching date: 25/ 02/ 2010

Period 74.

Unit 12: Let’s eat !

Lesson 2: A1,2. What shall we eat?

I.The aims :

By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to use the structures : I don’t like …..either , I like ……too
/ neither do I , So do I to express references . Practice speaking skill .

II. Language content :
 1.Vocabulary :

Review food vocabulary .
 2.Grammar :

2 - I like …..too / So do I .

3 - I don t like ’ ……either / Neither do I .

III.Technique :

Explanation , pairwork , groupwork ,
IV.Teaching aids :

Textbook , sub- board , pictures .

V.Procedure :

Teacher s activities’ T Ss activities’
1. Warm up :

- Greetings .

- Have Ss play a game : Networks

1’ - Greetings .
- Play a game .

Go to the board and write
down .

</div>
(112)<div class='page_container' data-page=112>

Call on 2 students from 2 groups to go to the board and write
down .

- Remark .
2.Presentation :
*vocabulary:

- Mango(es) (n) xo i (pic)à

- Display(v) trưng bày,bày bán. (trans)
- Corn(n) ngô , bắp. (pic)

- Selection(n) sự lựa chọn (trans)
- Select(v)

*Explain some sentences of Hoa and her aunt in the dialogues.
*Model sentences :

S1: I don t like pork .’

S2: Neither do I / I don t either .’
S1: I like spinach and cucumbers .
S2: So do I / I do , too.

( So and too are used in the formative sentences . Neither 
and either are used in the negative sentences .)

EX: S1: I am a student .

S2: So am I / I am , too .
S1: I like beef .

S2: I do , too . / So do I .
S1: She isn t a doctor . ’

S2: I am not , either . / Neither am I .
S1: I don t like chicken .’

S2: I don t , either / Neither do I .’

( Not either = Neither )

3.Practice :

-Give some pictures or given words to Ss to practice .

+ Carrots . X
+ Beef V 
+ Papaya V 
+ Cabbage X 
+ Fish X 
+ Chicken V

-Have Ss work in pairs using the structures they have just learnt

and given words .

-Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class .
- Remark

- Ask Ss to write in the notebooks .
- Have Ss practice in pairs .

-Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class .
- Remark .

4.Production :

Have Ss take a survey .
Make example :

S1: I like durians . Do you like them ?
S2: Yes , I like them , too / So do I .

- Call on Ss to give the results .
- Remark .

5.Homework :

-Learn by heart the structures by making 3 sentences with
each.

5’

7’

5’

14’

8’

3’

2’

Listen to the teacher .
Copy down .

Practicing using given
words .

Work in pairs .

- Practice in front of the
class .

S1: I don t like carrots.’
S2: Neither do I

I don t , either ’
S1: I like beef .
S2: So do I 
 I do , too.

- Write down .
-Practice in pairs (free)
-Practice in front of the
class .

-Take a survey .
- Listen .
Practice in groups .
-Give the results .

- Write homework .
Talk about the food.
-Work in groups making
conversations.

-Practice in front of the
class.

-Write homework.

- Retell the content of the
lesson individually.
- Copy down homework.

</div>
(113)<div class='page_container' data-page=113>

-Do exercise 2,3 at page 74 in workbook .
-Prepare part 3,4 .

Week 27(8)

Tuần giáo án chào mừng ngày

mùng 8 tháng 3

Planning date: 27/ 02 / 2010
Teaching date: 1/ 03/ 2010

§ 75.

Unit 12: Let’s eat !

Lesson 3: A3, 4. What shall we eat?

I . The aims :

By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to reading the text to understand how to make a meal by making some dishes
.They can consolidation the past simple tense and regular verbs.

- Develop 4 skills.

II. Language content :

1.Vocabulary :To slice / Bowl /To boil / To heat / To stir- fry / Soy sauce /Chopsticks / Spoon 
 2.Grammar : The past simple tense

III.Technique: Eliciting, pairwork, groupwork.
IV.Teaching aids: Textbook, tape, cassette, pictures .

V.Procedure :

Teacher s activities’ T Ss activities’
1. Warm up :- Greetings .

- Ask Ss some questions :

EX: Do you like chicken?/ Beef ?

Do you know how to prepare a meal?
 Lead in the new lesson.

2.New activities :

A. Read, then answer the questions .

-Ask Ss to look at the pictures and answer the question: What
is she doing ?

- Call on some Ss to give the answer.

-Introduce the situation and explain some new words to Ss.
+ To slice ( v ) : Th¸i (mime)
+ To boil ( v ) : Luéc (trans)
+ To heat ( v ) : ®un nãng (trans)
+ To stir – fry ( v ) : Xµo (trans)
+ Bowl ( n ) : C¸i b¸t (realia)
+ Chopsticks ( n ) : §ịa (realia)
+ Soy sauce ( n ) : Xì dầu (realia)
+ Spoon ( n ) : Th×a (realia)
-Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually.

- Correct their pronunciation.

-Have Ss play a game: Rub out and remember in order to check
new words .

- Have Ss guess the order of the statements :

a) First , she sliced the beef .

b) Then she cooked some rice and boiled some spinach.
c) Hoa’s aunt cooked dinner .

d) Next, she sliced some green pepers and onions .

e) And then she set the table and the family sat down to eat .
f) After that she stir- fried the beef and vegetables .

g) Finally , she sliced the cucumbers and made cucumber salad .

- Ask Ss to work in groups ordering the sentences .
- Call on some groups to give their prediction
-Ask Ss to look at the book and listen to the tape then check the order .

1’

5’

7’

5’

14’

- Greetings.
Answer T’s questions.

Look at the pictures and
answer the question.
-Listen to the teacher.

Read new words in chorus
and individually, guess the
meanings, then copy
down.

Play a game.

- Do exercise.
Work in groups.
-Give the predictions.
-Listen to the tape and
check the order.

-Read the text in silent.
-Read the text aloud.

- Work in groups.
-Give the answers.

</div>
(114)<div class='page_container' data-page=114>

- Call on some Ss to give the answers .
- Correct and give the correct answer :
1. C 2. A 3. D 4. B 5. F 6. G 7. E

- Have Ss read the text in silent .

- Call on some Ss to read the text aloud .
- Ask Ss to work in groups to write the menu
- Call on some groups to give the answers .
- Correct and give the correct answer :
+ Cucumber salad with onions .

+ Boiled spinach

+ Stir- fried beef with green pepers and onions
+ Rice

- Ask Ss to write in the notebooks .

-Have Ss read the text again then complete the sentences by
adding the missing verbs .

-Have Ss exchange the results with their partners .
- Call on some Ss to give the answers .
- Correct and give the answer key :
1. Slice 2. slice 3. heat 4. stir- fry
5. add 6. cook 7. add

-Ask Ss to match the completed sentences with the pictures .
- Have Ss exchange the results with the partner .

- Call on some Ss to give the answers .

- Correct and ask Ss to write down .

1. C 2. F 3. A 4. D 5. B 6. E 7. G

B. Write . What did you eat and drink yesterday ?
-Ask some Ss the questions : what did you eat and drink
yesterday ?

-Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering the questions .
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class .
3.Consolidation :

-Have Ss write a short paragraph to tell what they ate and drank
yesterday .

-Call on some Ss to read their writing in front of the class .
-Remark .

4.Homework :

-Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each.
-Do exercise 5 at page 76 in workbook.

-Prepare B1 .

8’

3’

2’

-Read the text again and
complete the sentences.
-Exchange the results with

the partners .

-Give the answers .
- Write down .
-Match the sentences with
the pictures .

-Exchange the result with
the partner .

-Give the answer .
- Write down .
-Asnwer the question .

- Work in pairs .

-Practice in front of the
class .

-Write a short paragraph.
-Read the writing in front
of the class .

Write homework .
-Write homework.

- Retell the content of the
lesson individually.
- Copy down homework.

Tuần giáo án chào mừng ngày

mùng 8 th¸ng 3.

Planning date: 27/ 02 / 2010
Teaching date: 2/ 03/ 2010.

§76 :Trả và chữa bài kiểm tra

I/ The aims:

- Help Ss know their mistakes and then correct them.

- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to avoid some typical mistakes.
II. Preparation:

- T: Key and points.
- Ss: Test.

III. Procedures:

</div>
(115)<div class='page_container' data-page=115>

- Who’s absent today?
2. Warm up:

3. New lesson: (30’)

- T asks ss to look at their tests.

- T and ss correct together: KEY & MARK.

I. Read. Then answer the question. ( 2,5pts) ( 0,5 pt / 1 sentence )

1. They returned home by bus.

2. No, he didn’t.

3. They had a great holiday in Nha Trang.
4. Yes, they did .

5. The bus stopped at a small roadside restaurant at four o’clock.
II. Language focus (5pts)

A. Choose the best answer. (4pts) ( 0,5 pt / 1 word ) 
1. was not 5. temperature

2. Aquarium 6. What
3. had 7. to hear

4. of 8. records
 B. Matching ( 1pt) ( 0,25 pt / 1 sentence )

1+c 2+d 3+a 4+b
IV. Writing (2,5pts) ( 0,5 pt / 1 sentence )

Write the sentences using the words given.

1. I bought a lot of different gifts for my friends in America.
2. She looked at my teeth and told not to worry.

3. Brushing your teeth is very important. Clean teeth are healthy teeth.

4. Lan didn’t go to school yesterday because she had a headache.

5. I was absent from school last semester.

Week 27(8)

Tuần giáo án chào mừng

ngày mùng 8 tháng 3

Planning date: 01/ 03/ 2010
Teaching date: 04/ 03/ 2010

§ 77.

Unit 12: Let’s eat !

Lesson 4: B1.Our Food

I.The aims :

By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know why Ba had to go to the doctor’s and the reason

which caused Ba’s stomachache.

II. Language content:

The structures:

- It must be

…………

..

- It was probably ………

- Make + somebody + Adj/ Do smt .

*The past simple tense and present simple tense.

III.Technique:

Eliciting, asking and answering, pairwork, groupwork.

IV.Teaching aids:

Textbook, tape, cassette, pictures.

V.Procedure:

Teacher s activities’ T Ss activities’
1. Warm up :

- Greetings .

</div>
(116)<div class='page_container' data-page=116>

-Have Ss play a game : Guessing game .

( Each student writes a sentence about the disease they had last
time . One student goes to the board and the rest guess )
-Remark and lead in the new lesson .

2.New activities :

-Ask Ss to look at the picture and answer the question:
Where is Ba ?

What is the matter with him ?

- Call on some Ss to give their predictions .

-Ask Ss to look at the book , listen to the tape and check their
prediction.

- Call on some Ss to give the correct answers .
+ Ba is at the doctor s .’

+ He has an awful stomachache .
-Explain some structures to Ss .

+ It must be something you ate .
+ It was probably the spinach .
+ That dirt can make you sick .

+ These medicine will make you feel better.
-Have Ss make sentences with the structures.

-Have Ss read the dialogue in pairs.

-Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class.
- Correct their pronunciation.

 Comprehension questions :
-Have Ss play a game: Lucky numbers.
1. What did Ba eat last night?

2. Who washed the spinach?
3.LN

4. Why did Ba go to the doctor?
5. Did his parents eat spinach?
6.LN

7. What made him sick?

8. What did the doctor give him?

-Remark and state the group which wins the game.
 Now complete the story.

-Ask Ss to complete the story based on the dialogue above.
-Have Ss exchange the result with the partner.

-Call on some Ss to give the result in front of the class.
*Correct and give answer key :

Ba went to the doctor because he was sick. The doctor asked 
Ba some questions. Ba said he had some spinach last night. 
The doctor said he must wash the spinach more

carefully/well. Vegetables can be dirty. The dirt can make 
people sick. She / the doctor gave Ba some medicine to make 
him feel better.

-Call on some Ss to read the story in front of the class
3.Consolidation :

-Repeat the content of the lesson and the structures.
4.Homework :

-Learn by heart the structures by making 3 sentences with each
-Do exercise 1,2 at page 76,77 in workbook .

-Prepare part B2.

5’

7’

5’

14’

8’

3’

2’

-All class take part in the
game .

-Look at the picture
carefully .

-Give the predictions .
-Look at the book and
listen to the tape .
-Give the answers .

-Listen to the teacher and
copy down.

-Make sentences using the
structures.

- Work in pairs.
-Practice reading the
dialogue in front of the
class.

-Play a game in 2 groups
take part in the game .

- Clap hands .
-Complete the story .
-Exchange the result with
the partner .

-Give the result .
- Copy down .
-Read the story aloud .
-Listen carefully .

Write homework .
-Write homework.

</div>
(117)<div class='page_container' data-page=117>

Planning date: 06 / 03/ 2010
Teaching date: 09/ 03 / 2010

§78.

Unit 12:

Let’s eat !

Lesson 5:B2,4

I.The aims :

By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to know about a balanced diet . Listen to a text for details and
further practice in food vocabulary . They continue to practice listening skill .They will know what they should
do to have a healthy lifestyle.

II. Language content :
 1.Vocabulary :

- Balanced diet /- Energy / - To affect - Body- building food / - Moderate - Dairy 
product / - Amount / - Cereals / - Lifestyle / - Plenty of

2.Grammar : Review the food vocabulary .
 The past simple tense

III.Technique :

Explanation , using pictures or real objects , pairwork , groupwork .
IV.Teaching aids :

Textbook , tape , cassette , pictures .

V.Procedure :

Teacher s activities’ T Ss activities’

*Warm up :

- Greetings .

- Ask Ss some questions such as :

-What do you usually have for breakfast / lunch / dinner ?
+ What is your favorite food ?

- Remark and lead in new lesson .
1. New activities :

-Introduce the situation : “ Food plays an important part in

our life . It gives us the main energy for body development . 
thus , a balanced diet is especially important . In our today s ’

lesson , we will learn about the definition of a balanced diet 
and useful guidelines about food”

-Explain some new words and phrases to Ss.

+ Balanced diet ( n ) : Chế độ ăn hợp lí ( Trans)
+ To affect ( v ) : ảnh hưởng( Trans)
+ Moderate ( adj ) => Moderation ( n )
+ Amount ( n ) : Số lượng( Trans)
+ Energy ( n ) : Năng lượng( trans)

-Body- building food ( n ) : Thức ăn giúp phát triển c¬ thĨ.
+ Dairy product ( n ) : Thực phẩm bơ sữa(explain)

+ Cereals ( n ) : Ngò cèc (trans)

+ Lifestyle ( n ) : Lèi sèng (trans)

+ Fatty food ( n ) : Thức ăn giàu chất bÐo (trans)

- Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually.
- Have Ss play a game : Rub out and remember .
- Ask Ss to do an exercise : T or F prediction
What does a balanced diet mean?

1) Eat a lot of meat .

2) Eat a little fruit and vegetables .
3) Eat a moderate amount of sugar .
4) Eat a little fatty food .

5) Eat plenty of food you like .

-Have Ss discuss in groups .Call on Ss to give their discussion .
-Ask Ss to look at the book , listen to the tape and check their
prediction .

- Call on some Ss to give the answers .

1’

4’

23’

8’

6’

- -

Greetings .

Answer T’s

questions .

Listen to the teacher .

Listen and write .

Read new words in

chorus and individually

, guess meanings , then

copy down .

Play a game .

Do exercise .

Work in groups .

-Give their prediction.

-Look at the book ,

listen to the tape and

check the prediction .

-Give the answers .

</div>
(118)<div class='page_container' data-page=118>

-Correct the mistake and give the correct answer :
1. F 2. F 3. T 4. T 5. F
- Have Ss read the passage in silent .

- Call on 3 or 4 students to read the passage aloud .
-Ask Ss to read the passage again and find out the answers for
the questions .

- Have Ss work in pairs .

-Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of the class .
- Correct and give the answer key :

a) Sugar adds taste to food and it gives you energy .

b) A balanced diet is not enough all people need exercise to
keep a healthy life .

c) Ss’ Answers .
2. Consolidation :

- Ask Ss to do an exercise : Matching

Ask Ss to do an exercise : Matching

- Ask Ss match and talk about a balanced diet .
- Make example :

To have a balanced diet we should eat a lot of fruit ...
- Have Ss work in groups .

-Call on some gr oups to give their dicussion in front of the
class .

3. Homework :

-Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each .
-Write a menu for yourself and your family .

Prepare part 4 .

2’

1’

again to find out the

answers .

Work in pairs .

-Practice asking and

answering in front of

the class .

-Write the answers in

the notebooks .

Do exercise .

Do exercise then talk

about “ a balanced

diet”

Listen .

- Work in groups .

- Give the discussion in

front of the class .

Write homework .

Week 28(9).

Planning date: 05 / 03/ 2010
Teaching date:10/ 03 / 2010

§79.Language Focus 4

I.The aims :

The students do exercises in order to practice the structures which have been learnt , they will use them and
apply to do exercises well .

II. Language content :

- The simple past tense .

- Indefinite quantifiers : A little / a lot of / lots of / too much .
- Too / either / neither / so .

- Imperatives .
III.Technique :

Eliciting , asking and answering , pairwork , groupwork , using pictures .
IV.Teaching aids :

Textbook , sub- board , pictures .

V.Procedure :

Teacher s activities’ T Ss activities’

*Warm up :Greetings . 1’ - Greetings .

Should

A lot of

Alittle

Sugar Fatty food

Meat fruit
Shouldn’t Too much

Plenty of

</div>
(119)<div class='page_container' data-page=119>

- Ask Ss some questions such as :
+ What did you do yesterday ?
+ Did you watch TV last night ?

+ What did you do during last summer vacation ?...
- Remark and lead in new lesson .

*.Consolidation and practice :
1)Past simple tense :

-Ask Ss to look at the pictures in the book and answer what
they are doing .

-Call on some Ss to answer the questions in front of the class .
a) Watch TV .

b) Eat at a restaurant .
c) Go to the movie theatre .
d) Read books .

e) Play soccer .

-Have Ss answer the questions , using the pictures .
- Make example :

S1: Did you do your homework last night ?
S2: No, I didn’t . I watched TV .

-Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering the questions .
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class .
- Correct and give the correct answers .

f) Did you eat dinner at home on Wednesday ?
No, I didn’t . I ate dinner at a restaurant .

g) Did you go to school yesterday ?
No, I didn’t . I went to the movie theatre .
h) Did you watch a video on the weekend ?
No, I didn’t . I read books .

i) Did you play basketball yesterday ?
No, I didn’t . I played soccer .

Ask Ss to write in the notebooks .
2)Indefinite quantifiers :

-Have Ss repeat the indefinite quantifiers and the use .
- Ask them to do exercise 2 .

 Write the correct expression .

-Ask Ss to write the correct expression , using the pictures .
-Call on some Ss to give the answers in front of the class .

- Correct and give the correct answers :
+ A little coffee . + A lot of salt .
+ A lot of tea . + Too much water .
+ A little sugar

-Ask Ss to write in the notebooks .
 Complete the dialogues :

Have Ss look at the pictures and then complete the dialogues .
- Have Ss work in pairs .

-Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class ./Remark .
3+ 4) Too and either / So and neither .

Ask Ss to repeat the use of too/ so / either and neither .
- Have Ss practice the dialogues in pairs .

- Call on some pairs to practice in front the class .
-

Have Ss play a game : Noughts and Crosses .

Mangoes v Bananas x Papaya v

Corn v Spinach x potatos x

Fish x Chịken x beef v

-Remark and ask Ss to write sentences in the notebooks.
EX: S1: I like mangoes .

S2: So do I / I do , too .
S1: I don’t like bananas .

4’

23’

8’

6’

2’

-Answer T’s questions .

- Look at the pictures and
answer what they are doing
.

-Answer the questions .

-Work in pairs .

-Practice in front of the
class .

- Write down .
-Repeat the indefinite
quantifiers and the use.

- Do exercise .
Write the correct
expression .
Give the answer .
Write down in the
notebooks .

-Look at the pictures and
complete the dialogues .

- Work in pairs .
-Practice in front of the
class.

-Repeat the use of too,
either , so and neither .
-Practice the dialogues in
pairs .

-Practice in front of the

class

- Play a game .
2 groups take part in the
game .

</div>
(120)<div class='page_container' data-page=120>

S2 : I don’t , either / Neither do I .
5) Imperatives :

- Ask Ss to look at the pictures and complete the instructions .
- explain some new words :

+ To Peel ( v ) /+ To mix ( v ) /+ Vinegar ( n )
-Call on some Ss to give their result in front of the class .
-Correct and give the answer key :

a) peel / e) Add/ b.Wash / f) Stir
b) Slice / g) Wait / c.Mix
 Consolidation:

- Repeat the structures which the students have learnt .
* Homework:

- Do test yourself 4 in workbook
- Review for doing a written test .

1’

- Write down .
-Look at the pictures and

complete the instructions .
-Listen and write down
Give the answer .
Write down in the
notebooks .

Listen carefully .
Write homework .

Week 28(9).

Planning date: 07 / 03/ 2010
Teaching date: 12/ 03 / 2010

§80.

Unit 13:

ACTIVITIES

Lesson 1: A1,4.

I.The aims :

By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to know about the ten most popular sports which teenagers in the
USA like best and know the names of some sports . They will know how to change from adjectives to adverbs.
II. Language content :

1.Vocabulary :

- Skate boarding - Roller- skating
- Roller – blading - Baseball

- Surprisingly - Surprising result .

- To win the prize: đoạt giải - Competition (n) Cuộc đua, cuộc thi
- Prize - Participant: (n)Người tham dự
 2.Grammar :

Review the simple past tense and simple present tense .
III.Technique :

Eliciting , using pictures , pairwork , groupwork .
IV.Teaching aids :

Textbook , tape , cassette , pictures .

V.Procedure :

Teacher s activities’ T Ss activities’
1*Warm up :-Greetings .

-Ask Ss some questions such as :

+ Do you like playing sports ?
+ What sport do you play ?
+ When do you play …….?
+ Who do you often play with ?

+ What do you think about ………? …………

-Remark and lead in new lesson .
2*New activities :

A) Listen and read . Then answer the questions .
-Introduce the situation of the lesson and ask Ss to look at the
pictures then answer the questions :

What are they doing ?
-Explain some new words :

+ Skate boarding ( n ) :trượt ván (trans)
+ Roller- skating ( n ) :Trượt patanh
 (loại giày có bánh ở 4 góc)

+ Roller- blading ( n ) :Trượt patanh

( loại giày có bánh xe dọc ở dưới đế giày)

1’

4’

- Greetings .
Answer T’s questions .
Listen to the teacher , look
at the pictures and answer
the question .

Listen and write down .
-Read new words in chorus
and individually , guess
meaning then copy down .
Play a game

</div>
(121)<div class='page_container' data-page=121>

+ Baseball ( n ) :bóng chày ( explain)

+ Surprising result ( n ) : Kết quả đáng ngạc nhiên
+ Surprisingly ( adv ) :Ngạc nhiên

-Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually .
-Have Ss play a game : Slap the board .

-Have Ss discuss in groups about the question : What sports do you
think are the most popular in the USA ?

-Call on some groups to give their prediction .

-Ask Ss to look at the books and listen to the tape then check their
prediction .

Call on some Ss to give the answers .
Ask Ss to read the text in silent .
-Call on some Ss to read the text aloud .
Have Ss answer the question :

What is the most popular sport in the USA ?
Which sport is at 11th position ?

-Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering the questions .
-Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class .

B) Read . Then answer the questions .

-Ask Ss to look at the picture and answer the question: what kind of
sports in the picture ?

What is WFF? WTS?
Call on some Ss to answer .

Ask Ss to read the text and check the answer.
*Explain some new words to Ss.

+To win ( v ) => won /+ Prize ( n ) :

+Participant ( n ) : A person who take part in the game .

-Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually .
-Ask Ss to read the text in silent .

-Call on some Ss to read the text aloud.
-Correct the pronunciation .

-Have Ss work in pairs to ask and answer the questions .
-Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class .
-Correct the mistakes and give the correct answers .

a) He takes part in WFF.

b) His school team won the first prize , they were so happy and 
wanted to keep this activity .

c) One activity is a 5 walk to the beach on Sunday morning , and 
the other is walk- to – school day

d) It s 5 km from school to the beach .’

e) Wednesday is the WTS day .

f)Members living near school often take part in the WTS day.
-Ask Ss to copy down .

3. Consolidation:+Take a class survey :

-Ask Ss to write the number of students who like each sport
best , then complete the table in the notebooks .

4.Homework :

-Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each.
-Write what sports you like best .

-Do exercise 1,2 in workbook .Prepare part A3,5

23’

8’

6’

2’

1’

prediction .

-Give the answers .
-Read the text in silent .
-Read the text aloud .
-Answer the questions .

- Work in pairs .
Practice in front of the
class .

-Look at the picture and
answer the question .
-Answer the question.

- Read the text .
Listen and write down .
Read new words in chorus
and individually .

-Read the text in silent .
-Read the text aloud .
Work in pairs .

-Practice in front of the
class .

-Copy down.
Work in groups .

-Practice in front of the
class .

-Write the number of the
students who like each
sport best .

-Answer the question .
-Have Ss work in groups
asking their classmates
what sport they like most .
Some groups to practice in
front of the class .

-Ask Ss to answer the
question : What sport is 
the most popular in the 
class ?

Write homework

Week 29(10)

Planning date: 12 / 03/ 2010
Teaching date: 16/ 03 / 2010

§81.

Unit 13:

ACTIVITIES

Lesson 2: A3,5.

I.The aims :

After the lesson , Ss will be able to know how to change from adjectives into adverbs .They will continue to
talk about sports .

</div>
(122)<div class='page_container' data-page=122>

- Skillful => Skillfully - Safe => safely
- Cyclist - To cycle
- To be aware of - Lifeguard
- Strict - To obey
 2.Grammar :

Structure : Adjectivie + ly => adverb
III.Technique :

Explanation , eliciting , pairwork .
IV.Teaching aids :

Textbook , tape , cassette , pictures .
V.Procedure :

Teacher s activities’ T Ss activities’
1. Warm up :

Greetings .

Have Ss play a game : Networks

Have Ss work in groups .

-Call on Ss from 2 groups to go to the board and write .
-Remark and state the group which wins the game .

2.New activities :

A) Listen . Then practice with a partner .

-Introduce the situation of the lesson , then ask Ss to look at the
pictures and call the names of the pictures .

- Explain some new words to Ss .
+ Good ( adj ) => well ( adv )

+ Skillful ( adj ) => Skillfully ( adv ) : điêu luyện, có kĩ thuật.
+ Safe ( adj ) => Safely ( adv ) 1 cách an toàn.

+ Cyclist ( n ) : người đi xe đạp.
+ To cycle ( v ) = To ride a bike

-Introduce how to change adjectives into adverbs and the use
of Adj and Adv :

Adjective + ly => adverb 
EX : Slow => Slowly 
 Bad => badly 
 Quick => quickly

+ He’s a good soccer player
 He plays soccer well
+ She’s a quick runner
 She runs quickly .

 Adjectives often go with To Be

 Adverbs often go with ordinary verbs .

-Ask Ss to make sentences using adjectives and adverbs .
-Have Ss look at the books and listen to the tape .

-Have Ss work in pairs reading the text .

-Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class .
B) Write . Change the adjectives in brackets to adverbs .
-Ask Ss to complete the passage with the correct adverbs in
brackets .

-Explain some new words to Ss .

+ To be aware of: ko nhận thấy sự nguy hiểm
+ Lifeguard ( n ) người cứu hộ

+ Strict ( adj ) => Strictly : 1cách nghiêm khắc.
+ To obey ( v ) vâng lời nghe lời.

-Have Ss exchange the result with the partner

1’

4’

23’

8’

Greetings .

-Play a game :

Networks

Discuss in groups .

-Go to the board and

write

Listen to the teacher .

Listen and write down .

Read new words in

chorus and individually

, then copy down .

Listen to the teacher

carefully .

-Make sentences with

the adjectives and

adverbs .

-Look at the books and

listen to the tape .

Work in pairs .

-Practice reading in

front of the class .

-Complete the passage

with the correct

adverbs .

-Listen and write down.

-Exchange the result

with the partner .

Most popular

</div>
(123)<div class='page_container' data-page=123>

-Call on 2=> 3 Ss to give the results in front of the class .
-Correct and give the correct answers

-Ask Ss to write in the notebooks .
3.Consolidation:

-Repeat the way to change adjective to adverb .
-Give some cues and ask Ss to make sentences .

+ Slow / slowly / swimmer 
+ Quick / quickly / runner 
+ Bad / badly / volleyball 
*Make example :

+ She’s a slow runner. =>She runs slowly .
-Have Ss work in pairs .

-Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class .
-Correct the mistakes .

4.Homework :

-Learn by heart new words and structures by making sentences

with them .

-Do exercise 3,4 at page 83 in workbook .
Prepare part B1 .

6’

2’

1’

-Give the results in

front of the class .

-Write down .

Listen .

-Make sentences with

the cues .

-Practice in front of the

class .

Write homework.

Week 29(10)

Planning date: 12 / 03/ 2010
Teaching date: 17/ 03 / 2010

§82.

Unit 13:

ACTIVITIES

Lesson 3: B1,4

I.The aims :

The students will cotinue to practice about the topic of sports and in modal verbs. Then practices
II. Language content :

1.Vocabulary :

- Ought to /should/Must / Spare(adj) D thừa, để dành/ Spare part:Phụ tùng thay thế.
-Ocean(n) Đại Dơng/ Opportunity(tạo) cơ hội.

2.Grammar :

Making an invitation :

Would you like to …………?

=> Yes , let s / I d like to / That s a good idea .’ ’ ’
III.Technique :

Eliciting , pairwork , groupwork ,
IV.Teaching aids :

Textbook , tape , cassette , pictures .

V.Procedure :

Teacher s activities’ T Ss activities’
1. Warm up :

- Greetings .

- Have Ss play a game : Find someone Who .

- Remark and lead in new lesson .
2.New activities :

-Ask Ss to look at the picture and answer the question: What
are they doing ?

-Ask Ss to look at the books and listen to the tape .

1’

4’

- Greetings .
- Play a game .
Listen to the teacher .
-Look at the picture and
answer the question .
-Look at the book and
listen to the tape .
Listen and write down .
Make sentences with the
structures .

- Work in pairs .
-Practice reading in front of
the class .

Find someone who………… Name
Can play soccer well.

Can run quickly .

Can play volleyball skillfully .
Can’t swim quickly .

</div>
(124)<div class='page_container' data-page=124>

-Explain some new words to Ss .
* New words:

+ Should:Nên( v v)

+ Ought to ( modal verb ): Nªn (v v v )
+Must: cần thiết phải làm gì(v v v v)

Can/ Could:Có thể biết làm gì/Xin phép có thể làm gì
+ Paddle ( n ) : vợt (bãng bµn)

+ The structure : making invitation :

Would you like to play table tennis?

 I d like to .’

 Would you like to + V ?

EX : Would you like to come to my house ?
 have lunch with me ?

 He ought to do his homework before playing table tennis .
She ought to help her mother .

-Have Ss make sentences with the structures .
-Have Ss read the dialogue in pairs .

-Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class .

-Ask Ss to read the dialogue again to find the answers for the
questions .

-Ask Ss to work in pairs : one asks and one answers.
-Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of the class .
*Correct the mistakes and give the correct answers :
a) He must finish his homework before he plays table tennis .
b) Nam will be ready in a few minutes .

c) Ba will finish a question for math .
d) Ba has 2 paddles .

- Ask Ss to write in the notebooks .
*Further practice:Gap fill.(B4-137)

Asks Ss to complete the passage with modal verbs in the box.
-T. corrects and give them marks

3.Consolidation :

*Give some cues and ask Ss to practice :
+ Nam / before / soccer / do homework .
+ Lan / when / swimming / swim with adult.
+ We / after meals / brush teeth .

- Make example :

S1: What should Nam do before he plays soccer ?
S2: He must do his homework .

-Have Ss work in pairs .

-Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class.Remark.
4.Homework :

- Make 3 examples with each structure .
- Do exercise 1,2 at page 83,84 in workbook.
Prepare part B2.

23’

8’

6’

2’

1’

-Read the dialogue again to
find the answers .

Work in pairs .

-Practice in front of the
class .

-Write in the notebook.
Practice with the cues .

Listen .

Work in pairs .

-Practice in front of the
class:

S1: What should Lan do 
when she goes

swimming ?

S2: She must swim with 
an adult .

S1: What should we do 
after meals?

S2: We should brush our 
teeth .

 Answer keys:

1.can / 2. Must /3.must not
/4.should / 5. Can/ 6. 
Ought to/ 7.can / 8.should.

-Retell the main points of
this lesson.

Copy down homework .
Do all exercises,

Write homework .

Week 29(10)

Planning date: 12 / 03/ 2010
Teaching date: 19/ 03 / 2010

§83.

Unit 13:

ACTIVITIES

Lesson 4: B2, A2

</div>
(125)<div class='page_container' data-page=125>

The students will continue to practice in making , accepting and refusing an invitation ,

using modal verbs .

II. Language content :

Review the structure :

Would you like to + V

…………

.?



I d love to . / That s a good idea .

’



Sorry / That s too bad .

’

III.Technique :

Eliciting , using pictures .

IV.Teaching aids :

Textbook , tape , cassette , pictures , sub- board .

V.Procedure :

Teacher s activities’ T Ss activities’

1. Warm up :

Greetings .

-Have Ss practice using modal verbs : one student

gives the situation , one gives the advice .

EX: S1: I’m very cold .

S2: You should stay inside , you shouldn’t go out .

Ask Ss to work in pairs .

-Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class .

Remark and lead in new lesson .

2.Presentation :

+Introduce the situation of the lesson .

+Ask Ss to look at the books and listen to the tape .

+Have Ss work in pairs reading the dialogue .

+Call on 2 or 3 pairs to practice in front of the class .

Correct the pronunciation.

3.Practice :

-Ask Ss to make similar dialogues using the cues

given in the box replacing the underlined words .

Make example :

S1: Come and play volleyball.

S2: I’m sorry . I don’t think I can .

S1: That’s too bad . Why not ?

S2: Well, I should visit my grandmother .

S1: Can you play on the weekend ?

S2: Yes, I can .

S1: All right . See you on Saturday afternoon .

S2: Ok. Bye .

S1: Bye .

Have Ss work in pairs .

-Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class .

Correct the mistakes if necessary .

4.Production :

-Ask Ss to make their own dialogues , using the 3

pictures in the bottom .

Give some cues ;

S1: Come and play

………

.

S2: I’m sorry ,

………

..

S1: Why not?

1’

4’

23’

8’

6’

Greetings .

Practice in pairs .

Work in pairs .

-Practice in front of the

class .

Listen to the teacher .

-Look at the book and

listen to the tape .

-Work in pairs .

-Practice in front of the

class.

-Make similar

dialogues , using given

words .

-Listen .

Work in pairs .

-Practice in front of the

class .

</div>
(126)<div class='page_container' data-page=126>

S2: I must ………

S1: Can you

…………

..?

S2: Yes,

…………

..

S1:

………

.

+Have Ss work in pairs .

+Call on some pairs to make dialogue in front of the

class .

Correct the mistake .

1. Homework :

Write 3 dialogues in the workbook .

Do exercise 3,4 in workbook .

Prepare part B3,4 .

2’

1’

of the class .

-Write homework.

Week 30(11)

Planning date: 18 / 03/ 2010
Teaching date: 22/ 03 / 2010

§84.

Unit 13:

ACTIVITIES

Lesson 5: B3

I

.The aims :

After the lesson , Ss will know about a new sport and they continue to practice with modal verbs .
Practice reading skill.

II. Language content :
 1.Vocabulary :

- Surface / - Scuba diving / - Underwater / - To invent => invention
- Pearl diver / - Vessel / - To explore / - Special breathing equipment
- Human / - Opportunity

2.Grammar :

Review the modal verbs .
III.Technique :

Eliciting , using pictures , pairwork , groupwork .
IV.Teaching aids :

Textbook , pictures , sub- board

V.Procedure

Teacher s activities’ T Ss activities’
1. Warm up :

Greetings .

Have Ss play a game : Networks

Have Ss work in groups .

Call 2 Ss from 2 groups to go to the board and write .
-Remark and lead in new lesson .

2. Presentation :

-Introduce the situation of the lesson and ask Ss to look at
the pictures and answer the question : what are the
pictures about ?

-Explain some new words to Ss .

1’

4’

- Greetings .
Play a game .

Work in groups .

-Go to the board and write
Listen to the teacher and
look at the pictures , then
answer the question .
Listen and write .Read new
words in chorus and
individually , guess the
meanings , then copy down

</div>
(127)<div class='page_container' data-page=127>

*Vocabulary:

+ Surface ( n ) bề mặt (trans)

+ Underwater ( n ) dưới nước (trans)

Pearl diver ( n ) = the person who dives underwater and
finds the pearls .

+ To invent ( v => invention ( n ) phát minh
Special breathing equipment ( n ) dụng cụ thở đặc biệt
+ Scuba- diving ( n ) lặn có sdung bình dưỡng khí

+ Vessel ( n ) = ship : t u, thuyà ền
+ To explore ( v ) thám hiểm
+ Human ( n ) = people
+ Opportunity ( n ) = chance

-Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually .
Correct the pronunciation .

 Have Ss do exercise : True or False prediction
( Questions in B3 at page 137 )

-Have Ss work in groups .

-Call on some groups to give their predictions .
3. While – reading :

-Have Ss read the passage and check their predictions.
-Call on some Ss to give the answers and ask them to
correct the false sentences .

 Reading comprehension : Lucky numbers .

1) How long could a pearl diver stay underwater?
2) Now, How long can a diver stay underwater?
3) LN

4) When did Jacques Couteau die?

5) When did he invent the deep sea diving vessel ?
6) LN

7) What could he study ?

8) How can we explore the oceans now ?

-Have Ss work in groups .

-Ask Ss to complete the passage with the modal verbs in
the box .

-Have Ss exchange the results with the partners .

-Call on some Ss to give the answer in front of the class .
-Correct the mistakes .

4. Post – reading : Have Ss talk about inventions .
- Give some cues :

 Before motorbike, we couldn’t ………
- Have Ss work in groups .

-Call on some groups to give the results in front of the
class .

- Remark .
5. Homework :

Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each .
Do exercise 5 at page 86 in workbook .

Prepare unit 14 – A1

23’

8’

6’

2’

1’

Do exercise .
Work in groups .
Give the predictions .
Read the passage and
check the prediction .
Give the answers , then
correct the false sentences

a) F. Most of the world’s
surface is water .
b) T

c) T

d) F. Jacques Couteau
invented a deep- sea
diving vessel .
e) T

Play a game in groups
Complete the passage .
Exchange the results with
the partners .

Give the answers.
 Inventions :

+ Special breathing equipment .
Explore the oceans .

Learn about the sea

EX: Before special breathing
equipment we couldn’t explore
the oceans , we couldn’t learn
about the sea ……..

+ Electricity :
Read all nights
Watch TV
Use computers
Listen to music

 Before electricity ,
we couldn’t ……..
+ The motorbikes :

Travel far .
Get home quickly .
Visit places

-Talk about the inventions .
Work in groups .

-Give the results in front of
the class .

Write homework .

Week 30(11)

</div>
(128)<div class='page_container' data-page=128>

§85.

Unit 14:

Freetime fun

Lesson1: a1. Time for tv

I.The aims :

After the lesson , Ss will learn about a new topic , The activities in freetime such as watching TV ,
playing chess….. and know specific information about Lan and Hoa .

II. Language content :
 1.Vocabulary :

- Series - Adventure 
 - Cricket - To sound 
 - to prefer - To guess 
 2.Grammar :

Review the invitation and accepting or refusing .
Would you like to ………….

=> I d love to / I m sorry , I can t ’ ’ ’ ……

III.Technique :

Eliciting , pairwork , groupwork , using picture .
IV.Teaching aids :

Textbook , tape , cassette , picture .
V.Procedure

Teacher s activities’ T Ss activities’
1. Warm up :

- Greetings .

Chatting with Ss about their freetime by some questions :
What do you usually do in your freetime ?

Do you like watching TV?

Do you like watching news in English?
What programs on TV do you like watching?
What is your favorite program?

How much time do you spend watching TV a day ?
.

………

- Remark and lead in new lesson .
2. Presentation :

+Ask Ss to look at the picture and introduce : This is the

picture of Hoa’s family . Look at it and guess what they do in
their freetime ? do they watch TV?

+Introduce the situation : Watching TV is one of the most
popular activities in freetime . We are going to listen to a
dialogue between Lan and Hoa . What do Lan’s / Hoa’s
family do in their freetime ?

Explain some new words to Ss .

+ Series ( n ) : loạt, chuỗi,phim nhiều tập(số nhiều ko
đổi)

+ Adventure ( n )cuộc phiêu lưu (trans)
+ Cricket ( n )con dế (trans)

+ To prefer ( v ) = to like ……better …
+ To sound ( v )Nghe thây, tiếng… (trans)
+ To guess ( v ) = to predict :đoán (trans)

- Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually
.

- Have them play a game : what and where .
+Ask Ss to guess what Lan and Hoa usually do in the
evening .

- Call on some Ss to give their predictions .
3. Practice :

+Ask Ss to look at the books , listen to the tape and check
their predictions .

1’

4’

23’

8’

- Greetings .
Answer the questions .

Look at the picture and
listen .

Listen to the teacher .

Listen and write down .

Read new words in chorus
and individually , guess the
meanings , then copy
down.

- Play a game .
+Guess what Lan and Hoa
do in the evening .

-Give the predictions .
- Look at the books , listen
to the tape and check the
predictions.

- Give the answer :
Hoa usually talks about her
day, then she reads and
sometimes she plays chess.
Lan usually watches TV.
+Work in pairs reading the
dialogue .

+Practice reading in front
of the class .

</div>
(129)<div class='page_container' data-page=129>

- Call on some Ss to give the answers .
+Have Ss work in pairs reading the dialogue

Call on 3 or 4 pairs to read the dialogue in front of the class .
-Ask Ss to read the dialogue again then choose the best
answers .

- Have Ss exchange the results with the partners .
- Call on some Ss to give the answers .

- Correct and give the key :

a) Lan invites Hoa to eat dinner with her family .
b) Lan wants Hoa to watch TV before dinner .

c) Hoa s family doesn t have a TV because her aunt and ’ ’
uncle don t like watching TV.’

d) Hoa likes spending time with her aunt and uncle at 
night.

e) Lan s family always watches TV in the evening’
Ask Ss to write in the notebooks .

*Production :

+Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering about
themselves.

- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class .
- Remark .

4.Consolidation:

- Retell the main points of this lesson.
5.Homework .

+Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each .
Do exercise 1 at page 87 in workbook .

Prepare part A2 .Prepare unit 14 – A1

6’

2’

1’

+Exchange the results with
the partners .

- Give the answers.
- Write down.

- Work in pairs .
+Some pairs practice in
front of the class .

Retell the main points of
this lesson.

Write homework .

Week 30(11)

Planning date: 18 / 03/ 2010
Teaching date: 25/ 03 / 2010

§86.

Unit 14:

Freetime fun

Lesson 2: a2. Time for tv

I.The aims :

The students practice the dialogue in order to review the structure “ Would you like

to

………

?” question and answer to talk about their favorite TV program .

Practice speaking skill.

II. Language content :

1.Vocabulary :

- Detective movie - Pop concert

- Classical concert - Cowboy movie

- Drama - Advertisement

2.Grammar :

Review : Would you like to + V ?

III.Technique :

Eliciting , using picture , pairwork , groupwork .

IV.Teaching aids :

Textbook , tape , cassette , sub- board .

V.Procedure :

Teacher s activities’ T Ss activities’

Warm up :- Greetings .

Have Ss play a game : Slap the board .

1’ -

Greetings .

</div>
(130)<div class='page_container' data-page=130>

Teacher reads in Vietnamese , Ss slap in English.

State the group which wins the game .

Remark and lead in new lesson .

2.Presentation :

Introduce the situation of the lesson .

-Ask Ss to look at the books and listen to the tape .

*Vocabulary:

+ Cowboy movie ( n ) phim cao båi

+ Detective movie ( n ) phim trinh th¸m

+ Pop concert ( n ) nh¹c pop

+ Classical concert ( n )

+ Drama ( n ) kịch

+ Advertisement ( n ) quảng c¸o

-Have Ss read new words in chorus and

individually

Correct their pronunciation .

-Have Ss work in pairs reading the dialogue .

-Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class

Correct the pronunciation .

Explain the model sentences :

What would you like to watch / see?

I d like to watch / see a cowboy movie .

’

3.Practice :

Ask Ss to look at the advertisements , make up

similar dialogues .

Have Ss work in pairs .

-Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class

Correct the mistakes if necessary .

4.Further practice :

Give a mapped dialogue :

Hoa

………

.Lan

Would

……

theater? -

…

.good . What would

you

………

..?

.easy life

.

…

……

youth theater . - Ok

…

Tuesday night?

Sorry

…

.E club .

How

…

.Thursday? - Ok .

Fine, let’s ………

-Have Ss work in pairs using mapped dialogue .

-Call on some pairs to role play in front of the

class .

Correct the mistake.

5/Homework :

Learn by heart new words .

Make a dialogue in the notebook .

4’

23’

8’

6’

2’

1’

-Each group has 3

students to take part in

the game.

Clap the hands .

Listen .

-Look at the books and

listen to the tape .

-Listen and write down.

Read new words in

chorus and individually

, guess the meanings ,

then copy down .

-Work in pairs reading

the dialogue .

-Practice reading in

front of the class .

Listen carefully .

Look at the

advertisements and

make up similar

dialogues .

Work in pairs .

-Practice in front of the

class.

S1: Would you like to

go to the concert this

week ?

S2: That sounds good .

What would you like to

see?

S1: There is a classical

concert on at Hanoi

opera House.

S2: Ok. Can you make

it on Tuesday night ?

S1: Sorry , I have to go

to E club .

S2: ………

- Look at the mapped

dialogue .

Work in pairs .

-Practice in front of the

class .

theate
r

advantur

e

concert

news

</div>
(131)<div class='page_container' data-page=131>

Prepare part A3 .

Prepare part A2 .Prepare unit 14 – A1

Write homework

Week 31(12)

Planning date: 27 / 03/ 2010
Teaching date: 29/ 03 / 2010

§87.Unit 14: Freetime fun

Lesson 3: a3. Tv in viet nam

I. The aims :

After the lesson , students will be able to understand about TV in Viet Nam thirty years ago and today

- Develop reading skill.
II. Language content :
 1. Vocabulary :

- Owner / - To change / - To gather / - Might 
 2. Grammar :

Review the simple present tense and past simple tense .
III. Technique :

Eliciting , pairwork , groupwork , using pictures .
IV. Teaching aids :

Textbook , pictures , sub- board .

V. Procedure :

Teacher s activities’ T Ss activities’
1. Warm up :

- Greetings .

- Have Ss play a game : Hangman

3 words : Watch – television – living room
- Have Ss guess the words .

- Remark and lead in new lesson .

2. New activities :

A. Read : TV in Viet Nam

- Ask Ss to look at the pictures and say about them
- Introduce the situation of the lesson , then explain some
new words to Ss .

+ Owner ( n ) : the person who has TV:Người làm chủ
+ To gather ( v ) : Tụ tập, tập chung

+ To change ( v ) :Thay đổi
+ Might ( modal verb ) :

- Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually .
- Correct their pronunciation .

- Have Ss play a game : what and where .

- Ask Ss to do an exercise : True or False prediction.

1) Thirty years ago in Viet Nam , a lot of people had TV sets
.

2) These TV owners were very popular .

3) The neighbors gathered to watch color programs in the
evening .

4) Now , they don’t spend much time together .

5) A few people have TV sets today .

- Have Ss do exercise in groups .

- Call on some groups to give their predictions .
- Ask the rest groups to exchange the results .

- Have Ss look at the book , listen to the tape and check their
predictions .

- Call on some Ss to give the answers .
- Correct and give the answer key :
1. F 2. T 3. F 4. T 5 . F

1’

4’

23’

8’

Greetings .
- Play a game .

All class take part in the
game .

- Look at the pictures and
say about them .

- Listen and write .
- Read new words in
chorus and individually .

- Play a game .

- Work in groups .
- Give the predictions .
- Exchange the result.

- Give the answers .

- Some students read the
passage aloud .

</div>
(132)<div class='page_container' data-page=132>

- Call on some Ss to read the passage aloud .

- Give some answers and ask students to find out the
questions .

1) No, very few people .

2) The black and white programs .
3) They might sleep a little .
4) No, noone .

5) In their own living room .
- Have students work in pairs .

- Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of the class
- Correct the mistakes and ask students to write down .
* Now complete the summary :

- Ask students to read the passage again then find the words
to complete the summary .

- Have students exchange the results with the partners .
- Call on some students to give the answers in front of the
class .

- Correct the mistakes and give the answer key :
1. people 2. not 3. TV 4. popular
5. evening 6. gather 7. they 8. today
9. have 10. life 11. know

- Call on some students to read the summary aloud
B. Play with words .

- Ask students to look at the picture and answer the question
: what is she doing ?

- Play the tape for students .

- Ask students to look at the books and read after the tape .
- Call on some students to read aloud .

- Correct their pronunciation .
3. Consolidation :

- Have students work in groups discussing the advantanges
and disadvantanges of TV .

- Call on some groups to present their ideas .
- Correct if necessary .

4. Homework :

Learn by heart new words by making 2 sentences with them
- Do exercise 3,4 at page 89 in workbook .

- Prepare part B1,2 .

6’

2’

1’

- Work in pairs .
- Practice asking and
answering in front of the
class .

- Read the passage again
and complete the

summary .

- Exchange the result with

the partner .

- Give the answer in front
of the class .

- Read the summary aloud
.

- Look at the picture and
answer the question .
- Listen to the tape .
- Look at the book and
read after the tape .
- Read aloud .

- Work in groups .

- Give the ideas in front of
the class .

- Write homework .

Week 31(12)

Planning date: 27 / 03/ 2010
Teaching date: 31 / 03 / 2010

§88.Unit 14: Freetime fun

Lesson 4 : b1,2. What’s on ?

I. The aims :

The students continue to practice the topic about TV , they talk about their favorite programs and the
time of some programs on TV .

II. Language content :
 1. Vocabulary :

- Sports show - Children’s program
- Early news - Weather forecast
- The world today - A first ful of dollars’
 2. Grammar :

What kinds of programs do you like ?
III. Technique :

Eliciting , pairwork , groupwork .
IV. Teaching aids :

</div>
(133)<div class='page_container' data-page=133>

V. Procedure :

Teacher s activities’ T Ss activities’
1. Warm up :

- Greetings .

- Have students play a game : Jumbled words .
+ RGMAPOR=>……… …. ..
+ NEATERGE=>……… ………. .

+ SUMIC=>………..
+ VOMEI=>………..
+ REHATTE=>……… …….. ..
+ ODARI=>………...

- Call on 2 students to go to the board and write down .
- Remark and give marks .

2. New activities :

A. Listen . Then practice with a partner .

- Ask students to look at the picture and answer the
question: What’s on TV ?

- Introduce the situation of the dialogue , then ask students
to guess what kinds of programs Nga/ Ba likes.

- Call on some students to give their predictions .

- Have students look at the book and listen to the tape and
check their prediction .

- Have students work in pairs reading the dialogue .

- Call on 3or 4 pairs to read the dialogue in front of the class
.

- Correct their pronunciation .
* Now answer :

- Ask students to read the dialogue again to find out the

answers for the questions .
- Have students work in pairs .

- Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of the class .
- Correct and give the correct answers :

a. No’ she doesn’t because there aren’t many good programs
for teenagers .

b. Ba likes to watch sports shows, cartoons and movies .
c. Nga likes to watch programs about teenagers in other
countries .

d. Because they don’t play the kind of music she likes .
e. She is going to listen to the radio and maybe read a book .
- Ask students to write in the notebooks .

B. Listen . write the times of the programs .
- Have students look at 5 programs in part 2 .
- Ask them to predict the times of these programs .
- Call on some students to give their predictions .

- Ask them to listen to the tape and check their prediction.
- Play the tape again for students .

- Call on some students to give the answers in front of the
class .

- Have students listen to the tape again and check the
answers .

- Correct and give the answer key :
a. Children’s programs : 5:oo
b. Early News : 6:oo
c. Weather forecast : 6:10
d. The world Today : 6: 15

e. Movie : “ A firstful of dollars” : 7:oo

- Have students write the answers in the notebooks .
3. Consolidation :

- Give some cues then ask students to practice asking and
answering :

+ Morning News
+ Teenagers.
1’
4’
23’
8’
6’
2’

- Greetings .
- Play a game .
+ Program

+ Teenager
+ Music
+ Movie
+ Theater
+ Radio

- Go to the board and
write .

- Look at the picture and
answer the question .
- Listen and guess .

- Give the prediction .
- Look at the book , listen
to the tape and check the
prediction .

- Work in pairs .

- Practice in front of the
class .

- Read the dialogue again
to find the answers .
- Work in pairs .
- Practice asking and
answering in front of the
class.

- Write in the notebook .
- Look at the programs in
the book .

- Predict the time of the
programs .

- Give the prediction in
front of the class .
- Listen to the tape .
- Give the answers.
- Listen to the tape and
check the answers.
- Write in the notebooks.
Work in pairs .

</div>
(134)<div class='page_container' data-page=134>

+ The world of animals .
+ Music programs .

- Have students work in pairs .

- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class .
- Correct the mistakes .

4. Homework :

- Learn by heart new words .

- Do exercise 1,2 at page 90 in workbook .
- Prepare part 3,4 .

1’

class .

- Write homework .

- Write down homework.

Week 31(12)

Planning date: 29 / 03/ 2010
Teaching date: 03 / 04 / 2010

§89.Unit 14: Freetime fun

Lesson 5 : b3,4. What’s on ?

I. The aims :

After the lesson , the students will understand about popular TV programs . They will continue to
know some more vocabulary about TV programs .

II. Language content :
 1. Vocabulary :

- Audience/ - To contest / - Artist /- Contestant /- To perform / - Folk music
- Imports / - To include / - Satellite / - Cable TV

2. Grammar :

Review : the simple present tense .

III. Technique :

Explanation , using pictures , pairwork , groupwork .
IV. Teaching aids :

Textbook , pictures , tape , cassete , sub- board .

V. Procedure :

Teacher s activities’ T Ss activities’
1. Warm up :

- Greetings .

- Have students play a game :
Noughts and Crosses

- Have students play in 2 groups .
- State the group which wins the game.
2. New activities :

A. Listen and read . Then answer the questions .

- Ask students to look at the three pictures and identify them
- Introduce the situation of the lesson , then explain some
new words :

+ Audience : The person who watches the shows .
+ Artist ( n ) : A famous singer .

+ To perform ( v ) :

+ To contest ( v ) = To compete
+ Contestant ( n ) = Competitor
+ Folk music ( n ) :

+ Imports ( n ) = foreign series .
+ To include ( v ) :

- Have students read new words in chorus and individually .
1’

4’

23’

8’

Greetings .

- Play a game .

All class take part in the

game

- Play game in 2 groups .

EX: What kind of programs
do you like?

I like to watch Early

News .

- Look at three pictures

and identify them .

- Listen and write .

Read new words in

chorus and individually ,

guess the meanings ,

then copy down .

- Play a game .

_ Do an exercise .

- Work in groups .

- give the prediction .

Listen to the tape and

check .

- Give the answers in

front of the class

Early News The world Weather
today forecast
Cartoons Sports shows Movies

</div>
(135)<div class='page_container' data-page=135>

- Check new words by playing a game called rub out and
remember .

- Have students do an exercise : T or F prediction .

1. Pop music , contests , imports are popular TV programs .
2. Teenagers like to listen to classical music .

3. There are contests of knowledge .

4. The contestants are students , workers , TV viewers .
5. Imports are very expensive .

- Have students work in groups in 2 minutes .
- Call on some groups to give their predictions .

- Ask students to look at the books , listen to the tape and
check their predictions .

- Call on some students to give the answers .
- Correct and give the correct answers :
1. T 2. F 3. T 4. T 5. F
- Have students read the passage aloud .
- Correct their pronunciation .

- Ask students to work in pairs asking and asnwering the
questions in the books .

- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class .
- Correct the mistakes and give the correct answers .
a. Teenagers like to hear the latest pop music and see the
shows of their favorite artists .

b. They are students , workers or family members .
c. Imports usually include police and hospitals .
d. Students’ answer.

B. Write.

+ To be possible : the same meaning with Can.
+ Satellite ( n ) :

+ Cable TV ( n ) :

- Have students complete the passage , using the words in
the box .

- Ask students to exchange the results with the partners .
- Call on some students to give the results in front of the
class .

- Correct and give the answer key :

- Ask 2 students to read the passage aloud .
3. Consolidation :

- Have students take a survey :
_ Have students work in groups .
( Each group has a secretary )
4. Homework :

- Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each .
- Do exercise 3,4 at page 91 in workbook .

- Review for doing a test in the next lesson

6’

2’

1’

- Read the passage aloud.

- Work in pairs .

- Practice asking and

answering in front of the

class .

- Read the words in the

box .

- Listen and write .

- Complete the passage .

- Exchange the results

with the partners .

- Give the results in front

of the class .

- Read the completed

passage aloud .

- Take a survey .

Listen .

Complete the passage . Use

the words in the box .
- Ask students to look at the
words in the box and read
them aloud .

- Explain some new words to
students .

Ex: S1: Do you want to hear
pop music ?

S2: Yes, I do./ No, I
don’t .

Or : S1: What TV programs
do you want to see?

S2: I want to see the
contests .

1. Around 2. Watch 3.
Listen 4. Series
5. Show 6. Like 7.
Station 8. Receive
9. Cities 10 .
Possible

- Work in groups .
- Write homework .

Week 31(13)

Planning date: 02/ 04/ 2010

Teaching date: 05/ 04 / 2010

Period 90.

WRITTEN TEST ( 45’)

ENGLISH 7

</div>
(136)<div class='page_container' data-page=136>

To check Ss’ progress and Ss’ understanding.

To evaluate Ss’ level.

To help Ss focus on learning tasks.

B/ Preparation:

Teacher’s questions

Ss’ consolidation

C/ Proceduce:

Đề và đáp án trong ngân hàng đề.

Week 31(13)

Planning date: 02/ 04/ 2010

Teaching date: 05/ 04 / 2010.

Period 91.

Unit 15: Going out

Lesson 1: A1. Video games

I. The aims :

After the lesson , the students will be able to give the advice and respond for not doing

something such as : playing video games . They will talk about video games and

disadvantages of playing video games .

II. Language content :

1. Vocabulary :

- Video games - Arcade

- Amusement center - Addictive

2. Grammar :

Structure : Don’t spend too much of your time in the arcade .

No, I won’t .

III. Technique :

Eliciting , pairwork , groupwork ,

IV. Teaching aids :

Textbook , tape , cassette , sub- board .

V. Procedure :

Teacher s activities’ T Ss activities’

</div>
(137)<div class='page_container' data-page=137>

- Greetings .

- Have Ss play a game : Networks .
- Have Ss play game in 2 groups .
- Remark and lead in new lesson .
2. New activities :

- Introduce the situation of the lesson , then ask Ss to look at
the picture and answer the question :

What can you see in the picture ?
*Vocabulary:

+ Amusement center (n)A place where we can go to play 
some games for relaxing .Trung tâm giải trí.

+ Video games ( n ) :

+ Arcade(n)/a:’keid/ nơi mua bán có mái vịm, khu vui chơi

+ Addictive ( adj ) nghiện,có tác dụng gây nghiện

- Have students read new words in chorus and individually .
- Have students play a game : what and where .

- Have students look at the dialogue and listen to the tape .

- Ask students to read after the tape .

- Have students work in pairs reading the dialogue.

- Call on 3 or 4 pairs to practice reading in front of the class.
- Correct their pronunciation .

- Introduce the new model sentence :

+ Don’t spend too much of your time in the arcade.
=> No, I won’t .

( Advise somebody not to do something .)
- Ask students to make examples as model .

- Ask students to read the dialogue again and find the
answers for the questions in the book .

- Have students work in pairs .

- Call on some pairs to practice asking and answering in
front of the class .

- Have some students go to the board and write the correct
answers .

- Ask students to write the answers in the notebooks .
a. He’s going to the amusement center .

b. He’s going to play video games .

c. He goes to the amusement center about once a week .
d. No, he doesn’t .

e. He usually stays for about an hour .
f. Because video games can be addictive .
g. He will do his homework later .

3. Consolidation :

- Give a mapped dialogue and ask students to look at
carefully .

YOU YOUR FRIEND
Where ….going ? Amusement center
What …….do? video games
How often ? 2/ week
Don’t spend ….

video games …
Don’t forget ……
homework .

- Have students work in pairs .

- Call on 2 or 3 pairs to practice in front the class .
- Correct the mistake if necessary .

4. Homework :

- Learn by heart new words and structure by making 2
sentences with each .

- Do exercise 1, 2 in workbook .
- Prepare part A2,3 .

4’

23’

8’

6’

2’

1’

- Play a game .

2 groups take part in the
game .

Discuss in groups , then Ss
go to the board and write
down .

- Listen and answer the
question .

- Listen and write .

- Read new words .
- Play a game .

- Look at the book and listen
to the tape .

- Read after the tape .
- Work in pairs .

- Practice in front of the
class.

- Listen .

- Make examples as model .
- Find the answers for the
questions

- Work in pairs .
- Practice asking and
answering in front of the
class .

- go to the board and write
the answers .

- Write in the notebooks .

- Look at the mapped
dialogue .

- Work in pairs .

- Practice in front of the
class.

- Write homework .

</div>
(138)<div class='page_container' data-page=138>

Week 31(13)

Planning date: 05/ 04/ 2010

Teaching date: 10/ 04 / 2010.

Period 92.

Unit 15: Going out

Lesson 2: A2,3. Video games

I. The aims :

By the end of the lesson , students will be able to understand video games and some disadvantages of playing
video games .

II. Language content :
 1. Vocabulary :

- Inventor / - Social skill / - Dizzy / - Premises

- To develop / - Robbery / - To identify / - Industry
 2. Grammar :

- Modal verbs .

- The present simple tense .

III. Technique :

Eliciting , pairwork , groupwork .

IV. Teaching aids :

Textbook , tape , cassette , pictures .

V. Procedure :

Teacher s activities’ T Ss activities’

1. Warm up :

- Greetings .

- Ask students some questions such as :
+ Do you like playing video games ?
+ How often do you play video games ?

+ How long do you usually spend playing video games?
+ What do you think about playing video games ?
………

- Remark and lead in new lesson .

2. New activities :
A. Listen and read .

- Introduce the situation of the lesson , then ask students to do an
exercise : True or False prediction.

1. Children like playing video games because they are good fun .
2. It’ s very good for children to spend too much time on their own
3. Playing video games for a long time will make the children
become tired .

4. Children mustn’t play outdoors with their friends
5. Some inventors become rich when they are very young .
- Have students work in groups .

- Call on some groups to give their prediction.

- Ask students to look at the books and listen to the tape then check
their prediction .

- Call on some students to give the answers .
- Correct and give the correct answers :
1. T 2. F 3. T 4. F 5. T

- Have students listen to the tape again and introduce some new
words :

* Vocabulary:

+ Inventor ( n )( The person who invents videogames )người sáng
tạo, người sáng chế

+ Dizzy ( adj ) :hoa mắt, choáng váng

+ To develop ( v ) : phát triển

+ Social skill ( n ) :kĩ năng giao tiếp.
- Ask students to read the text in silent .
- call on 3or 4 students to read the text aloud .
- Correct their pronunciation .

* Now answer , complete the sentences .

- Have students read the text again to find out the answers .
- Have students exchange the results with the partners .

1’

4’

23’

8’

Greetings .

- Answer T’s questions .

- Listen and do exercise .

- Work in groups .
- Give the prediction .

- Listen to the tape and check
the prediction .

- Give the answers .
- Listen to the tape again.
- Read new words in chorus
and individually .

- Read the passage in silent .
- Read aloud .

Students read new words in
chorus and individually .
- Read the passage again to
find the answers .

- Exchange the results with the
partners .

- Give the answers .

</div>
(139)<div class='page_container' data-page=139>

- Call on some students to give the answers in front of the class .
- Correct the mistake and give the correct answers .

a) Many young people play video games .

b) Some inventors of video games become very rich

c) The doctor thinks all children should take part in outdoor
activities with their friends .

d) The doctor says you should spend little time playing video
games

- Have students write in the notebooks .

B. Complete the passage with the words in the box .

- Explain the request of the exercise then introduce some new
words .

+ To identify ( v ) : nhận dạng, nhận ra; đồng cảm với, coi như nhau

+ Premises ( n ) :đất đai,nhà cửa,công sở
+ Robbery ( n ) => robber ( n ) vụ trộm cướp

+ Industry ( n ) : nền công nghiệp

- Have students read new words in chorus and individually .
- Have students complete the passage .

- Ask them to exchange the results with the partners.
- Call on some Ss to give the answer in front of the class
- Correct and give the key :

1. be 2. have 3. is 4. identify 5. are
6. use 7. can 8. will 9. buy 10. show
- Call on 2 students to read the completed passage aloud
- Ask students to write down .

3. Consolidation :

- Have students work in groups discussing about the disadvantages
of playing video games .

- Call on some groups to demonstrate their ideas in front of the
class .

-Retell the main points of this lesson.

4. Homework :

- Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each .
- Do exercise 3,4 in workbook .

- Prepare the next lesson .

6’

2’

1’

- Listen and write .

- Read new words in chorus
and individually .

- Complete the passage .
- Exchange the results .
- Give the answers .

- Read aloud .
- Write .

- Work in groups .

-Some Ss retell the main points
of the lesson.

- Demonstrate the ideas .
- Write homework .

Week 32(14)

Planning date: 10/ 04/ 2010

Teaching date: 12/ 04 / 2010.

Period 93.

Unit 15: Going out

Lesson 3: A2. Video games

I. The aims :

After the lesson , students will be able to give the advice with should and shouldn’t .

II. Language content :

Review modal verbs with

should

and

shouldn t .

’

III. Technique :

Eliciting , pairwork , groupwork .

IV. Teaching aids :

Textbook , sub- board .

V. Procedure :

Teacher s activities’ T Ss activities’

1. Warm up :- Greetings .

- Have students play a games : Slap the board .
+ Play outdoors . /+ Take part in activities .

+ Play with friends ./ + Play video games ./ + Stay up late .
- Have students play in 2 groups .

- Remark and lead in new lesson .
2.Presentation :

1’

Greetings .

</div>
(140)<div class='page_container' data-page=140>

- Have students read the text in part A2 again then find out
the sentences using modal verbs .

- Call on some students to give the sentences in front of the
class .

- Give the table of grids and ask them to complete .

Activities in freetime Should Shouldn’t
+ Play outdoors .

+ Play video games for
a long time .

+ Take part in activities
with friends.

+ Spend a little time
playing video games.
+ Spend too much time

3. Practice :

- Ask students to use the grids to make sentences

about what they should do and shouldn’t do .

Ex : We should play outdoors .

Yes , we should .

- Have students work in pairs .

- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class .

- Correct the mistake .

4. Production :

- Have students play a game :

Noughts and crosses

Play outdoors Spend much money

on video games Take part in outdoors activities
Stay up too

late Play video games too much Be with people withour age
Spend little

playing video
games

Study hard Spend too much
time on our own

- Ask students to make sentences with should and

shouldn’t .

Ex: We should play outdoors .

We shouldn’t play video games too much.

- Remark .

* Consolidation:

- Retell the main points of this lesson

5. Homework :

- Learn by heart all structure grammar of this lesson

- Write 5 sentences with should and shouldn’t .

- Prepare part B1,2 .

4’

23’

8’

6’

2’

1’

- Find the sentences

using modal verbs .

- Give the results .

- Complete the table .

- Make sentences .

- Work in pairs .

- Practice in front of the

class .

S1: We shouldn’t play

video games for a long

time .

S2: No, we shouldn’t .

S1: We should take part

in activities with

friends.

S2: Yes , we should .

- Play a game .

2 groups take part in the

game .

- Make sentences with

should and shouldn’t .

- Write homework .

Some Ss retell the main

</div>
(141)<div class='page_container' data-page=141>

Week 32(14)

Planning date: 10/ 04/ 2010

Teaching date: 15/ 04 / 2010.

Period 94.

Trả và chữa bài kiểm tra

Số 2

I/ The aims:

- Help Ss know their mistakes and then correct them.

- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to avoid some typical mistakes.

II. Preparation:

T: Key and points.

Ss: Test.

III. Procedures:

1. Organization: 2’

- Good morning!

- Who’s absent today?

2. Warm up:

3. New lesson: ( 30 )-

’

- T asks ss to look at their tests.

- T and Ss correct together

- T gives

answer keys

4. Consolidation: 2

’

- Retell some typical mistakes.

5. Homework:1’

- Ask Ss to do ex 3,4 – workbook.

Week 32(14)

Planning date: 12/ 04/ 2010

Teaching date: 17/ 04 / 2010.

Period 95.

Unit 15: Going out

Lesson 4: B1,2.

In the city

I. The aims :

After the lesson students will be able to know about life in the city and life in the country . Practice 4
skills : listening , reading , speaking and writing .

II. Language content :
 1. Vocabulary :

</div>
(142)<div class='page_container' data-page=142>

- Awake - Get used to - Direction
 2. Grammar :

Review : the simple present tense and past tense .
III. Technique :

Brainstorming , Asking and answering , pairwork , groupwork .
IV. Teaching aids :

Textbook , tape , cassette , Pictures about the city and the country .

V. Procedure :

Teacher s activities’ T Ss activities’
11. Warm up :

- Greetings .

- Have students play a game : Wordsquare .

- Ask students to find the words which relate to the city and
country .

- Have students work in groups .
-Remark and lead in new lesson .
2. New activities :

- Ask students to look at the picture and answer the question :
What is the picture about ?

- Ask students some questions such as :

+ Do you like to live in the city or in the country ?

Why / why not ?

- Introduce the situation of the lesson .

- Ask students to look at the book and listen to the tape , then
answer the question : Lan and Hoa , who likes to live in the
city or in the country .

- Play the tape for students .
- Have students give the answers .

- Introduce some new words to students :
+ The rest ( n ) :Phần còn lại, số còn lại

+ Awake ( adj ) :Thức giấc, thức, tỉnh

+ To scare ( v ) :Sợ hãi

+ To hate ( v ) = to dislike

+ To get used to + N .quen với, thích nghi với

+ Direction ( n ) : sự điều khiển, sự chỉ huy

- Have students read new words in chorus and individually .
- Have students play a game : rub out and remember.

- Have students discuss about life in the city and life in the
country .

* Brainstorming :

Life in the city Life in the country
Crowded Little traffic
………… …………..
- Have students work in groups .

- Call on some groups to give their ideas .
- Have students read the dialogue in pairs .

- Call on some pairs to read the dialogue in front of the class .
- Correct the pronunciation .

- Ask students to read the dialogue again and find the
answers for the questions .

- Have students play a game : Lucky numbers
1. Where did Hoa live before ?

1’

4’

23’

8’

6’

Greetings .

- Play a game .

Discuss in groups to find the
words which relate to the
city and the country .

- Work in groups .
- Look at the picture and
answer the question .
- Answer T’s questions .

- Listen .

- Look at the book and listen
to the tape then answer the
questions .

- Give the answers .
- Listen and write .

- Read new words in chorus
and individually .

- Play a game .

- Discuss about life in the
city and life in the country .

- Work in groups .
- Give the ideas .

- Work in pairs reading the
dialogue .

- Practice reading the
dialogue in front of the class
- Find the answers .

- Play a game in 2 groups .

</div>
(143)<div class='page_container' data-page=143>

2. Why doesn’t Hoa like the city ?
3. LN .

4. What does Hoa do in the evening ?

5. What does Hoa dislike most in the city ? Why ?
6. Does She like the city ?

7. LN

8 . Why did Hoa like living in a village in Hue?
- Remark and ask students to write the answers in the
notebooks .

3. Consolidation :

- Ask students to use the questions in part B2 to work in pairs
discussing about life in the city and life in the country .
- Have students work in pairs .

- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class .
- Correct and remark.

4. Homework :

- Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each
- Write the answers in part B2 in the exercise books.
- Prepare part B3,4 .

2’

1’

- Write the answers in the
notebooks .

- Discuss about life in the
city and in the country .

- Work in pairs .

- Practice in front of the
class .

- Write homework .

Week 33(15)

Planning date: 16/ 04/ 2010
Teaching date: 19/ 04 / 2010.

Period 96.

Unit 15: Going out

Lesson 4: B3.4.

In the city

I. The aims :

After the lesson students will know how Hoa got used to the life in the city and what she could do .
They practice reading and listening skills .

II. Language content :
 1. Vocabulary :

- Rarely - To socialize
 2. Grammar :

- Review :

The simple present tense and past simple tense .

- Like / Prefer + to infinitive ; Like + gerund

III. Technique :

Eliciting , pairwork , groupwork , using pictures .
IV. Teaching aids :

Textbook , tape , cassette , pictures .

V. Procedure :

Teacher s activities’ T Ss activities’
1. Warm up :

- Greetings .

- Have students play a game : Networks

Have students work in groups .

- Have students go to the board and write .
- Remark .

2. New activities :
A. Read .

- Introduce the content of the text : The text tells how Hoa
got used to the city life .

- Ask students to read the text and find out what she could do
- Have students read the text in silent .

- Call on some students to give the answers in front of the
class.

- Call on some students to read the text aloud .
- Correct the pronunciation .

1’

4’

Greetings .
- Play a game .

- Work in groups .

- Go to the board and write .
- Listen .

- Read the text and find out
what she could do .

- Read in silent .

- Give the answers in front
of the class .

- Read the text aloud .
- Listen and write .

</div>
(144)<div class='page_container' data-page=144>

* Vocabulary: Introduce new words :
+ Rarely ( adv ) :hiếm khi

+ To socialize ( v ) : giao tiếp, quan hệ bạn bè

+ Structure : Like / prefer + to infinitive

Ex: Hoa likes to read / She prefers to socialize with her 
friends .

Like / prefer + gerund .

Ex: Hoa likes playing chess very much .

- Ask students to make sentences as model .

- Give some more questions and ask students to answer :
a) What did Hoa and her friends often do together ?
b) Why did Hoa rarely go to see movies or eat out in the
evening ?

c) Why couldn’t Hoa read many books in her village ?
d) Why did Hoa decide that the city wasn’t so bad after all ?
- Have students work in pairs .

- Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of the class .
- Correct the mistakes .

- Ask students to read the text again then make a list of the
things Hoa does in the evening , using the simple present
tense.

- Have students exchange the results with their partners .
- Call on some students to give their answers in front of the
class.

- Call one student to go to the board and write down .
- Correct and ask students to write in the notebooks .
B. Listen . Match each name to an activity .

- Introduce the aim of the listening .

- Ask students to look at the pictures and give the activity of

each picture .

- Call on some students to give the answers in front of the
class .

- Have students guess and write the names next to the
pictures .

- Ask students to listen to the tape and check their prediction.
- Play the tape for students .

- Call on some students to give the answers in front of the
class .

- Play the tape again for students to check the answers
- Correct and give the key :

Ba- b Hoa- a Nga – d
Nam – c Lan – f An – e
3. Consolidation :

- Ask students to use the model in part B3 and the pictures in
B4 to talk about what they like to do or dis like to do .

- Have students work in pairs .

- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class .
- Remark .

4. Homework :

- Write the things that you often do in the evening .
- Do exercises in part B in workbook .

- Prepare unit 15 –B4,5.

23’

8’

6’

2’

1’

- Make sentences .
- Answer the questions .

- Work in pairs .

- Ask and answer in front of
the class .

- Make a list of the things
Hoa does in the evening .
- Exchange the results .
- Give the answers in front
of the class .

- Go to the board and write .
- Write in the notebooks .
- Listen to the teacher .
- Give the activity of each
picture .

- Guess and write the names
next to the pictures .

- Listen to the tape and
check the prediction .
- Listen.

- Give the answers in front
of the class .

- Check the answers .

- Work in pairs .

- Practice in front of the
class .

- Write homework.

Week 33(15)

Planning date: 16 / 04 / 2010
Teaching date: 22 / 04 / 2010.

Period 97.

</div>
(145)<div class='page_container' data-page=145>

I/ The aims :

By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to consolidation all structure grammar .The students

do exercises in order to practice the structures which have been learnt , they will use them

and apply to do exercises well .

-Develop 4 skills: L,S,R,& W.

II. Language content :* Review

The simple past tense . / Preposition of position / How far

…

? /

How much

…

? / Compound adjectives / Directions

More,less,fewer. / Why-because

…

/ Imperatives ./ Like/dislike

…

III/Technique:

Eliciting, pair work, group work.

IV/Teaching aids:

T: Textbook, tape, cassette, sub- board.

S: EL books, Exercises books, notebook.

V. Procedure:

Teacher s activities’ T Ss activities’

*HOW MUCH IS IT ?

*Form : How much is it / are they ?
 It is / They are + price.
 How much +be + S ?

(How much + do/ does + S + cost?)
 à It s/ They re +( price )’ ’

*Use: Ask and answer about the prices.

*The simple past tense :

*Form: To be( was/were)…

S + V_ed …
 V_qkbqt …

*Use: Diễn tả h nh à động xảy ra v kà ết thóc tại 1 thời

điểm , khoảng thời gian x¸c định trong qu¸ khứ.

- T asks ss to write the past form of the verbs in the table
(p.97)

Eg : buy -- > bought

Note : Ordinary verbs are divided into 2 kinds :
 regular verbs (- ed ) / (-d)

 irregular verbs

- T asks ss to do ex b 4 (p.97-98)
- T gets feedback

* Answer key :

b, played / talked / bought / worked / sent
c, help my mom and study English.
*.More / Less and fewer :

* More + countable noun ( nhiều hơn)
 * Fewer + countable noun ( it hơn)
 * Less + uncountable noun (it hơn)

Asks ss to say the use of those then write the sentences
according to the pictures.

Eg : Before : there were 4 bananas
Now : there are fewer bananas.
* Prepositions :* Matching:

7. near a. bên trái
8. opposite b. gn 
9. between c. ở bên phải 
10. beside/ next to d. i din

11. to the right e. ở giữa 
12. to the left f. bªn c¹nh

1’

5’

7’

5’

-Greetings.
Play a game.

-Two groups take part in
the game.

-Listen to the teacher.

-Read the questions in the
book and guess the
answers ( work in groups)

-Give the predictions.
-Listen and check the
predictions.

-Listen and write down.

-Read new words in
chorus and individually,
guess meaning then copy
down.

- Ss to answer some qs
about the use, form of the
simple past tense :

Give the answers.

</div>
(146)<div class='page_container' data-page=146>

T asks ss to retell some prepositions then look at the map
and write the location of each store.

a. Eg : The restaurant is next to the bookstore.

*Why-because…

Why + do/does + S + V …?

- Because + S + V…

*Model sentences :

+ What was wrong with you ?
I had a headache.

+ What was wrong with her ?
She had a bad cold.

 Note : Hỏi và trả lời về tình trạng sức khỏe :

What + was wrong with + pronoun?
S + had + ( sickness )

* word cue drill :

 Model sentences : Position of adv of manner:
- S + V + (O) + adv of manner

- S + be/ look … + adj
- (a/ an) + adj + N

 Gammar:

Ex: bad – badly
Slow – slowly
But good – well

 Note : Express preferences :

 ( Diễn tả ý thích hoặc ko thích )

+ S + auxilary V, too.

So, auxilary V + not + either.

+ S + auxilary V + not + either.

Neither + auxilary V + S.

*Grammar:

+ S + ought to/ must/ can/ should + V(inf )

+ S + shouldn’t/ ought not to + V(inf)

* Note : hỏi về sở thích.

What would you like to + v (inf) ?

I’d like to + V ( inf ) + N (ten phim )

* Model sentences :

What kinds of programs do you like?
I like program about teenagers.

* Note : Hỏi và trả lời về ctrinh TV bạn thích

What kinds of programs do/ does + S + like ?

- S + like(s) + program about +

Chương trình..

*Model Sentences:

Don’t spend too much time in the arcade.
No, I won’t.

* Note : Lời khuyên , Câu mệnh lệnh

- Don’t spend too much time in + place.

Nhận lời : No. I won’t.

14’

8’

3’

Write the answers in the
notebooks.

-Look at the picture and
answer the questions.

Give the answers.
Look at the book and
listen to the tape.

Read the text in silent
Read the text aloud.

-Complete the story with
the suitable words.

Exchange the result with
the partner.

Ex: He plays soccer
(good/ well)

He’s a (good/ well)
player

- (to) play – player
- (to) run – runner

- (to) cycle – cyclist
*Examples:

Example :

S1 : What was wrong with
Lan ?

S2 : She had a heachache.
**a. S1 : I like spinach
and cucumbers

S2 : So do I / I do, too.
b. S1 : I don’t like pork.
S2 : Neither do I/ I
don’t, either.

a. Thích: I do, too
So do I
b.Khơng thích : I don’t
either

Neither do I

-Give the answers in front
of the class.

Listen to the teacher.
-Write homework.

- Retell the content of the

Lan/ headache

Ba/ stomachache

She/ toothache

You/ a cold

He/ flu

</div>
(147)<div class='page_container' data-page=147>

* Consolidation:

- Retell the main points of this lesson.
* Homework:

- Do all exercises.

- Learn by heart vocabulary and some structure grammar.
- Prepare for next lesson.

2’ lesson individually.
- Copy down homework

Week 33(15)

Planning date: 16 / 04 / 2010
Teaching date: 24 / 04 / 2010.

Period 98.

Unit 16: People and places

Lesson 1: A1,2 (154 – 155)

A. Objectives:

- By the end of the lesson , students will be able to talk about name of the countries in

Asia and their capital cities.

I

. Knowledge ; -The countries.

II. Skills:

- Speaking .

III. Teaching aids: - Pictures / By computer.

B. Procedures:

I. Settlements: - Greetings.

T : Good morning , class.

Ss: Good morning , teacher.

T : How are you?

Ss: I' m fine, thank you. And you?

T; How many students are there in your class?

S1: There are ...

II. Warm -up

: *

Matching

Bangkok

China

Beijing

Laos

Kuala Lumpur

Thailand

Phnom penh

Myanmar

Vientiane

Indinesia

Yangon

Cambodia

Jakarta

Malaysia

III/New lesson

:

Teacher s activities’ T Ss activities’

1. Presentation:

a. Pre- teach:

- (a) postcard : (realia)

- (a) capital : (example)

- (a) pilot : (explanation)

- (a) region : (symnonym)

Checking:R&R

b. Set the sence: Answer the questions:

1. Where is it?

5’

31’

</div>
(148)<div class='page_container' data-page=148>

2. Where is Bangkok?

3. Do you go to Thailand?

c. Dialogue: A1p. 154

- Work in pairs to read in pairs:

* Matching: p.155

-Work in two groups to match.

* Answer key:

d. Modal sentences:

Ex: A: Where does Ba's uncle fly to?

B : He flies to Bangkok.

A: Where is that?

B: It's in Thailand.

2. Practice: Word cue drills

a. Bangkok /Thailand

b. Beijing / China

c. Kuala Lumpur / Malaysia

d. Phnom penh / Cambodia

e. Vientian / Laos

f. Yangon / Myanmar

g. Jakarta / Indinesia

3. Further -practice: Do exercise A3 p. 100

- correct:

IV. Consolidation:

-The countries.

V. Homework:

1. Do exersise A1-2 p. 98-99in exercise book.

2. Prepare new lesson Unit 16: A3( p. 156 in

text book)

6’

2’

1’

-Answer the questions.

S1:

S2:

- Work in two groups

- Give feed back.

Tigers

Lions

- Give feed back.

- Work in pairs.

- Work in pairs

- Give feed back.

Ex:

A: Where does Ba's

uncle fly to?

B : He flies to

Bangkok.

A : Where is that?

B : It's in Thailand.

- Give feed back.

Week 34(16)

Planning date: 16 / 04 / 2010
Teaching date: 26 / 04 / 2010.

Period 99.

Unit 16: People and places

Lesson 2: A3,4 (156 – 157)

A. Objectives:

- By the end of the lesson , students will be able to read for details about tourist attractions in South- east
Asia and places

I. Knowledge ; - The places. The tourist actractions in South- east Asia.
 II. Skills: - Listening and Reading .

III. Teaching aids: - Pictures / By computer.

</div>
(149)<div class='page_container' data-page=149>

I. Settlements: - Greetings.

T : Good morning , class.
Ss: Good morning , teacher.
T : How are you?

Ss: I' m fine, thank you. And you?

T; How many students are there in your class?
S1: There are ...

II. Warm -up : Slap the board
 III. New lesson:

Teacher s activities’ T Ss activities’

A/A3

1. Pre- Listening:
a. Open- prediction:

- SS predict and fill in formation about pilot's schedule
in the table.

Monday/Tuesday/Wednesday/Thursday/Friday
Saturday/Sunday

2. While -listening: A3 p. 156
a. - Listen :

b.Corrects

B/A4:

1* Pre- reading:
a. Pre- teach:

-Destinations(n) điểm đến, nơi đi tới ( trans)
- (an) attraction: Sự hấp dẫn, lôi cuốn
(explanation)

- (a) monument:đài tưởng niệm, tượng đài

(translation)

- traditional(adj) thuộc truyền thống

(symnonym)

- ancient (adj) cổ xưa (example)
- (a) reasort: khu an dưỡng, khu nghỉ mát
(example)

- (to) admire:chiêm ngưỡng, ngắm nhìn
(translation)

Checking:R&R

b. Set the sence: Answer the questions:
1. Where is it ?

2. Do you like them ?
3. Why ?

c. Open- prediction: ( T/F? )
- Work in pairs to guess:

1. South east Asia has many attractions.
2. We could visit many monuments.

3. We can see shadow puppet shows in thailand.
4. There are thousands of kilometers of beaches.
2. While -reading: A2 p. 148

a. - Listen :

- Read the text and correct:

*Answer key:

a. T c. F
 b. F d. T
 - Correct:

b.Read the test and answer the questions: (a-f)
 Lucky numbers

1. The passage mentions three kinds of tourist
attractions. What are they?

2. What is the famous ancient temple in Jave?

5’

31’

6’

Gess to fill in the table:
Monday/Vientiane
Tuesday/Singapore
Wednesday/Yangon
Thursday/Bangkok
Friday/Singapore
Saturday/Hong Kong
Sunday/Jakarta
Answer key:
Monday

Bangkok and Singapore
Tuesday/Singapore
Wednesday/Jakarta
Thursday/Bali
Friday/Bali

Saturday/Hong Kong
Sunday

- Give feed back.
- Listen

- Give feed back:
- Work in pairs.
- Give feed back.
Give examples

Practice new words( listen
and repeat -> give meaning /
stress.

- Copy down.

- Answer the questions
- Guess:

- Work in pairs.
- Give feed back.
- Listen /Read

- Give feed back:
a. F d. F
b. T c. T/F

- Discuss in pairs
- Give feed back.
- Play agame in 2 teams

- Correct.

</div>
(150)<div class='page_container' data-page=150>

3. Where can people see famous traditional dances?
5. What can you see in the ocean?

3. Post- reading: *Discuss

- Work in groups to list somes kinds of attractions in
Viet Nam you may prefer.

Ex: - I may prefer the [ beaches ].
- I may prefer the food.

- I may prefer the monuments.

IV. Consolidation:

-Retell the main points of this lesson.

The tourist actractions in South- east Asia.

V. Homework:

1. Learn by heart new words

2. Do exersise A4 p. 101 in exercise book.

3. Prepare new lesson Unit 16: B1- 2 ( p.

157 - 158 in text book)

2’

1’

- Give feed back.

-Retell the main points of
this lesson.

- Copy down homework

Week 34(16)

Planning date: 20 / 04 / 2010
Teaching date: 29 / 04 / 2010.

Period 100.

Unit 16: People and places

Lesson 3: B1,3

A. Objectives:

- By the end of the lesson , students will be able to read for details about famous people

and events in Viet Nam .

I

. Knowledge ; - The famous people and events in Viet Nam .

II. Skills:

- Reading .

III. Teaching aids: - Pictures / By computer.

B. Procedures:

I. Settlements: - Greetings.

T : Good morning , class.

Ss: Good morning, teacher.

T : How are you?

Ss: I' m fine, thank you. And you?

T: who’s absent today?

S1: Ss’ answer

II. Warm -up

:

*Brainstorming

III. New lesson:

Teacher s activities’ T Ss activities’

1. Pre- reading:

a. Pre- teach:

- (a) general:

Đại tướng

(explanation)

- Defeat (v)

Đánh thắng , đánh bại

- (a) battle :

trận đánh,trận chiến đấu (translation)

- powerful(adj)

hùng mạnh, hùng cường

,

có quyền
lực lớn (symnonym)

- Army (n) quân đội (trans)

- (a) lead:

lãnh đạo

(trans)

- quiz(n)

Câu đố

(example)

5’

- Practice new

words( listen and repeat

-> give meaning / stress.

</div>
(151)<div class='page_container' data-page=151>

- Forces (n)

sức mạnh, quyền lực

- Commander –In- Chief

(n) Tổng tư lệnh

* kind (adj) (translation)

Checking: R and R

- Correct:

b. Set the sence: Answer the questions:

1.Who are they?

2.What are they doing?

3. What are they talking about ?

c. Open- prediction: ( T/F? )

- Work in pairs to guess:

3.Ex 3(p159)

-Read and answer the questions.

-T corrects and gives answer keys

IV/Consolidation:

– Retel the main points of this leson

- The famous people and events in Viet Nam .

V/. Homework:

1. Learn new words by heart.

2. Do exersise B1-2 p. 101-102 in exercise

book.

3. Prepare new lesson Unit 16: B4 ( p.

159-160 in text book)

31’

6’

2’

1’

- Answer the questions:

S1:

S2:

- Guess:

- Work in pairs.

- Give feed back.

- Listen /Read

- Give feed back

- Some Ss to go to the

board to do exercises.

- Discuss in pairs

- Give feed back.

-Retell the main points of
this lesson.

- Copy down homework

Week 35(17)

Planning date: 26 / 04 / 2010
Teaching date : 03 / 05/ 2010.

Period 101.

Unit 16: People and places

Lesson 4: B4.Famous People

</div>
(152)<div class='page_container' data-page=152>

- By the end of the lesson , students will be able to read for details about famous people

and their biography.

I

. Knowledge ; - The famous people and their biography.

II. Skills:

- Reading .

III. Teaching aids: - Pictures / By computer.

B. Procedures:

I. Settlements: - Greetings.

T : Good morning , class.

Ss: Good morning, teacher.

T : How are you?

Ss: I' m fine, thank you. And you?

Who is absent today?

Ss’ answer

II. Warm -up

:

III. New lesson:

Teacher s activities’ T Ss activities’

1. Pre- reading:

a. Pre- teach:

- (an) electric light bulb:

bóng đèn điện

(drawing)

- (a) power station

: nhà máy điện (example)

- (a) gramophone:

máy hát đĩa (symnonym)

- (a) motion picture:

phim ảnh (example)

- (a) fairy tale:

chuyện thần tiên

(realia)m

*Checking:R&R

b. Set the sence: Answer the questions:

1.Who are they?

2.What are they doing?

3. What are they talking about ?

c. Open- prediction:

- Work in pairs to guess:

1. Who is Thomas Edison?

2. Who is Has Chistian Andersen?

2. While -reading: B4 p. 159

a. - Listen :

- Read the text and correct:

*Answer key:

- Correct:

b.Read the test and answer the questions: (a-f)

Lucky numbers

3. Post- reading: Role play

a. Work in pairs to practice:

Ex:

A: Where were you born?

B: I was born in 1847.

- correct:

IV. Consolidation:

- The famous people and events in Viet Nam .

V. Homework:

1. Learn new words by heart.

2. Do exersise B3-4 p. 102-103 in exercise

book.

5’

6’

2’

1’

- Practice new

words( listen and repeat

-> give meaning / stress.

- Copy down.

- Answer the questions:

S1:

S2:

- Guess:

- Work in pairs.

- Give feed back.

- Listen /Read

- Give feed back:

- Discuss in pairs

- Give feed back.

Tigers

Lions

- Work in pairs.

- Give feed back.

- Correct.

- Work in pairs.

- Give feed back.

S1:

S2:

-Retell the main points of
this lesson.

</div>
(153)<div class='page_container' data-page=153>

3. Prepare new lesson Unit 16: B5 ( p.161 in

text book)

Week 36(18)

Planning date: 04 / 05 / 2010
Teaching date : 10 / 05/ 2010.

Period 102.

Unit 16: People and places

Lesson 5: B2,5.Famous People

A. Objectives:

- By the end of the lesson , students will be able to listen for details about the biography of

uncle Ho.

I

. Knowledge ; - The biography of uncle Ho.

II. Skills:

- Listening .

III. Teaching aids: - Pictures / By computer.

B. Procedures:

I. Settlements: - Greetings.

T : Good morning , class.

Ss: Good morning, teacher.

T : How are you?

Ss: I' m fine, thank you. And you?

T: who is absent today?

S: Monitor’s answer

II. Warm -up

:

Pelmanism

Leave/ left, go/went, become/became,move/ moved....

III. New lesson:

Teacher s activities’ T Ss activities’

1. Pre- listening:

a. Pre- teach:

- (to) found: Sáng lập (explanation)
- (to) form: Thành lập (symnonym)
- (to) declare:Tuyên bố,công bố (translation)

- independence (ucn)nền độc lập, sự độc lập(antonym)
- President(n) chủ tich, tổng thống, hiệu trưởng (Trans)

Checking: R&R

b. Set the sence: Answer the questions:

1.Where is uncle Ho from?

2.What's his birthday?

5’

- - Practice new words

( listen and repeat -> give

meaning / stress.

- Copy down.

</div>
(154)<div class='page_container' data-page=154>

3.When did he die ?

c. Open- prediction:

- Work in pairs to fill in the table:

2. While -reading: B5 p. 161

a. - Listen :

- T gets feedback

*Answer key:

3. Post- reading: Gap- filling

- Work in dividually to listen again the text and

fill in the gaps.

Ho Chi Minh...(1) born in 1890 in Nghe

An province, in the village of Kim Lien. When

he was 21 years old, he ...(2)Viet Nam

and...(3) to Africa,England and

America.After this, he...(4) in a hotel in

London in the early 1900s then moved toParis

in 1917. He ...(5) six years in Paris, one

year in Moscow.

4.

B2(a-b) p.158

in text book

a. Work in pairs to fill inthe gaps.

Ex: 1. like

- correct:

b. Make another dialogue use clever, strong,

fast, beautiful...

*.Exercises 2(158)

a/Complete the dialogue with the words in

the box. Then practice with a partner.

Asks Ss to do exercise in pairs.

T corrects and gives answer keys

1.like

2.prefer

3. guess

4.favorite.

b/ Make their own dialogues about famous

people Ss know. Using the adjectives in the

box.

IV. Consolidation:

- The biography of uncle Ho.

V. Homework:

1. Learn new words by heart.

2. Do exersise B5 p.103 in exercise book.

3. Review Unit 9-16 for the examination test.

32’

6’

2’

1’

S2:

- Guess:

- Work in pairs.

- Give feed back.

- Listen /Read

- Give feed back:

- Discuss in groups

- Give feed back.

-Play agame in two

teams: Tiger and Lion

* Keys:

1.Was

2. left

3. went

4. worked

5. ….



Keys

: Ss copy down
answer keys

Work in pairs.

- Give feed back.

- Correct.

- Work in pairs.

- Give feed back.

-Retell the main points of
this lesson.

- Copy down homework

Week 36(18)

Planning date: 10 / 05 / 2010
Teaching date : 13 / 05/ 2010.

Period 103.

</div>
(155)<div class='page_container' data-page=155>

(BÀI ÔN TẬP CUỐI NĂM)

I/ The aims :

By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to consolidation all structure grammar .The students do exercises
in order to practice the structures which have been learnt , they will use them and apply to do exercises
well .

-Develop 4 skills: L,S,R,& W.

II. Language content :* Review

The simple past tense . / Preposition of position / How far

…

? /

How much

…

? / Compound adjectives / Directions

More,less,fewer. / Why-because

…

/ Imperatives ./ Like/dislike

…

The simple past tense .

Indefinite quantifiers : A little / a lot of / lots of / too much .

Too / either / neither / so .

Imperatives .

III/Technique:

Eliciting, pair work, group work.
 IV/Teaching aids:

T: Textbook, tape, cassette, sub- board.
S: EL books, Exercises books, notebook.

V. Procedure:

Teacher s activities’ T Ss activities’
*Warm up :Greetings .

- Ask Ss some questions such as :
+ What did you do yesterday ?
+ Did you watch TV last night ?

+ What did you do during last summer vacation ?...
- Remark and lead in new lesson .

*.Consolidation and practice :
1)Past simple tense :

-Ask Ss to look at the pictures in the book and answer what
they are doing .

-Call on some Ss to answer the questions in front of the class.

i.Watch TV ./ k. Eat at a restaurant ./ l.Go to the movie theatre .
m.Read books ./ n. Play soccer .

-Have Ss answer the questions , using the pictures .
- Make example :

S1: Did you do your homework last night ?
S2: No, I didn’t . I watched TV .

-Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering the questions.
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class .

- Correct and give the correct answers .
j) Did you eat dinner at home on Wednesday ?
No, I didn t . I ate dinner at a restaurant .’

k) Did you go to school yesterday ?
No, I didn t . I went to the movie theatre .’

l) Did you watch a video on the weekend ?
No, I didn t . I read books .’

m) Did you play basketball yesterday ?
No, I didn t . I played soccer .’

Ask Ss to write in the notebooks .
2)Indefinite quantifiers :

-Have Ss repeat the indefinite quantifiers and the use .
- Ask them to do exercise 2 .

 Write the correct expression .

-Ask Ss to write the correct expression , using the pictures .
-Call on some Ss to give the answers in front of the class .

- Correct and give the correct answers :
+ A little coffee . + A lot of salt .

1’

4’

23’

- Greetings .
-Answer T’s questions .

- Look at the pictures and answer
what they are doing

-Answer the questions .
-Work in pairs .

-Practice in front of the class .
Write down .

-Repeat the indefinite quantifiers

and the use.

- Do exercise .
Write the correct expression .

Give the answer .

Write down in the notebooks .
-Look at the pictures and
complete the dialogues .

</div>
(156)<div class='page_container' data-page=156>

+ A lot of tea . + Too much water .
+ A little sugar

-Ask Ss to write in the notebooks .
 Complete the dialogues :

Have Ss look at the pictures and then complete the
dialogues.

- Have Ss work in pairs .

-Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class ./Remark.
3+ 4) Too and either / So and neither .

Ask Ss to repeat the use of too/ so / either and neither .
- Have Ss practice the dialogues in pairs .

- Call on some pairs to practice in front the class .
-

Have Ss play a game : Noughts and

Crosses .

Mangoes v Bananas x Papaya v

Corn v Spinach x potatos x

Fish x Chịken x beef v

-Remark and ask Ss to write sentences in the notebooks.

EX: S1: I like mangoes .
S2: So do I / I do , too .
S1: I don’t like bananas .

S2 : I don’t , either / Neither do I .

5) Imperatives :

- Ask Ss to look at the pictures and complete the instructions.
- explain some new words :

+ To Peel ( v ) /+ To mix ( v ) /+ Vinegar ( n )
-Call on some Ss to give their result in front of the class .
-Correct and give the answer key :

c) peel / e) Add/ b.Wash / f) Stir
d) Slice / g) Wait / c.Mix

*HOW MUCH IS IT ?

*Form : How much is it / are they ?
 It is / They are + price.
 How much +be + S ?

(How much + do/ does + S + cost?)
 à It’s/ They’re +( price )

*Use: Ask and answer about the prices.

*The simple past tense :

*Form: To be( was/were)…

S + V_ed …
 V_qkbqt …

*Use: Diễn tả h nh à động xảy ra v kà ết thóc tại 1 thời điểm , khoảng
thời gian x¸c định trong qu¸ khứ.

- T asks ss to write the past form of the verbs in the table
(p.97)

Eg : buy -- > bought

Note : Ordinary verbs are divided into 2 kinds :
 regular verbs (- ed ) / (-d)

 irregular verbs

- T asks ss to do ex b 4 (p.97-98)
- T gets feedback

* Answer key :

b, played / talked / bought / worked / sent
c, help my mom and study English.
*.More / Less and fewer :

* More + countable noun ( nhiều hơn)
 * Fewer + countable noun ( it hơn)
 * Less + uncountable noun (it hơn)

Asks ss to say the use of those then write the sentences
according to the pictures.

8’

6’

-Repeat the use of too, either , so
and neither .

-Practice the dialogues in pairs .
-Practice in front of the class

- Play a game .

2 groups take part in the game .

Make sentences with the words ,
using too, so , either and neither

Write down .

-Look at the pictures and
complete the instructions .
-Listen and write down
Give the answer .

Write down in the notebooks .

Two groups take part in the
game.

-Listen to the teacher.

-Read the questions in the book
and guess the answers ( work in
groups)

-Give the predictions.
-Listen and check the
predictions.

-Listen and write down.

-Read new words in chorus and
individually, guess meaning then
copy down.

- Ss to answer some qs about the
use, form of the simple past tense
:

</div>
(157)<div class='page_container' data-page=157>

Eg : Before : there were 4 bananas
Now : there are fewer bananas.
* Prepositions :* Matching:

1. near a. bên trái

2. opposite b. ở gần

3. between c. bên phải 
4. beside/ next to d. đối diện 
5. to the right e. ở giữa 
6. to the left f. bên cạnh

T asks ss to retell some prepositions then look at the map and
write the location of each store.

a. Eg : The restaurant is next to the bookstore.

*Why-because…

Why + do/does + S + V …?

- Because + S + V…

*Model sentences :

+ What was wrong with you ?
I had a headache.

+ What was wrong with her ?
She had a bad cold.

 Note : Hỏi và trả lời về tình trạng sức khỏe :

What + was wrong with + pronoun?
S + had + ( sickness )

* word cue drill :

 Model sentences : Position of adv of manner:
- S + V + (O) + adv of manner

- S + be/ look … + adj
- (a/ an) + adj + N

 Gammar:
Ex: bad – badly
Slow – slowly
But good – well

 Note : Express preferences :

 ( Diễn tả ý thích hoặc ko thích )

+ S + auxilary V, too.

So, auxilary V + not + either.
+ S + auxilary V + not + either.
Neither + auxilary V + S.

*Grammar:

+ S + ought to/ must/ can/ should + V(inf )
+ S + shouldn’t/ ought not to + V(inf)

* Note : hỏi về sở thích.

What would you like to + v (inf) ?
I’d like to + V ( inf ) + N (ten phim )

* Model sentences :

What kinds of programs do you like?
I like program about teenagers.

* Note : Hỏi và trả lời về ctrinh TV bạn thích
What kinds of programs do/ does + S + like ?
- S + like(s) + program about + Chương trình..

*Model Sentences:

Don’t spend too much time in the arcade.

2’

-Look at the picture and answer
the questions.

Give the answers.

Look at the book and listen to the
tape.

Read the text in silent
Read the text aloud.

-Complete the story with the
suitable words.

Exchange the result with the
partner.

Ex: He plays soccer (good/ well)
He’s a (good/ well) player

- (to) play – player
- (to) run – runner
- (to) cycle – cyclist
*Examples:

S1 : What was wrong with Lan ?
S2 : She had a heachache.

**a. S1 : I like spinach and
cucumbers

S2 : So do I / I do, too.
b. S1 : I don’t like pork.
S2 : Neither do I/ I don’t,
either.

a. Thích: I do, too
So do I

b.Khơng thích : I don’t either
Neither do I

-Give the answers in front of the
class.

Listen to the teacher.
-Write homework.

- Retell the content of the lesson
individually.

- Copy down homework

Ba/ stomachache

Adj. + ly = adv of

manner

Lan/ headache

He/ flu

You/ a cold

</div>
(158)<div class='page_container' data-page=158>

No, I won’t.

* Note : Lời khuyên , Câu mệnh lệnh
- Don’t spend too much time in + place.
Nhận lời : No. I won’t.

* Consolidation: Repeat the structures which the students
have learnt and Retell the main points of this lesson.

* Homework: -Do all exercises.

- Learn by heart vocabulary and some structure grammar.
- Prepare for next lesson.

1’

</div>

teaching date saturday september 20th 2008 dan tien secondary school 2010 – 2011 lesson plan english 7 the first semester week 1 teaching date 17 8 2010 period 1 ¤n tëp vµ h­íng dén ph­¬ng ph¸p h

LESSON PLAN - ENGLISH 7

The first semester

WEEK 1:

Teaching date: 17 / 8 / 2010.

Ôn tập

và hớng dẫn phơng pháp học môn

Tiếng Anh 7

Introduction

I. The aims and requests:

Help ss consolidate grammar of English 6.

By the end of the lesson ss will be able to remember grammar structures such as: The simple

present tense, the present continuous tense, the near future tense . Then they can do exercises

well

Develop 4 skills.

II. Preparation:

1. Teacher’s preparation: lesson plan, posters.

2. Ss’ preparation: books, notebooks.

III. Procedures:

<i>Teacher s activities</i>

’

<i>Ss activities</i>

’

1. Organization: Greeting, “Who’s absent today?”

2. Checking up ( No)

3. New lesson :

<i>A/ Introduce ss how to learn English well : </i>

<i>B/ Revise programmer of English 6 : grammar.</i>

1. The simple present tense :

Form of to be :

( + ) I: am (-) I am not (?) Am I...?

He He Is he

She is She is not she...?

It It It ( isn’t) it

We We Are we

You are You are not you...?

They They ( aren’t) they

Form of ordinary verbs: get / go/ have / brush...

(+) S + V/ Vs / Ves eg: I go to school by bike.

(-) S + do not He gets up at 6 a.m.

does not She brushes her teeth .

(?) Do + S + V... ?

Does

*Note: Verb ending in o / ch / sh /ss /x) add- es to form 3

person .Eg: He goes / She brushes / He watches.

 Use : The SPT is used to express habitual , routine

usual actions `

2. The present continuous tense :

 Form :

(+) S + am / is / are + V-ing

(-) S + am not / is not / are not + V-ing

1’

3’

20’

- Greeting

- Listen and

remember.

- Copy down.

- Repeat after T

(?) Am / Is / Are + S + V-ing...?

 Use: The PCT is used for an action happening now.

3. The near future tense :

 Form :

(+) S + am / is / are + going + to -V.

(-) S +am not / is not / are not +going + to-V.

(?) Am / Is / Are + going + to- V... ?

 Use: The NFT is used for intention or prediction to

happen in the near or immediate future.

<i>C- Exercises :</i>

IV. Consolidation :

Retell the main points of the lesson.

V- Homework :

- Ask ss to learn by heart grammar they’ve revised.

18’

2’

1’

- Copy down.

- Work

individually.

- Go to the bb to

teaching date saturday september 20th 2008 dan tien secondary school 2010 – 2011 lesson plan english 7 the first semester week 1 teaching date 17 8 2010 period 1 ¤n tëp vµ híng dén ph¬ng ph¸p h